Make default compression gABI compliant
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC6X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
535 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
536 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
537 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TILEGX
540
541 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
542 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEPRO
545 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset VISIUM
548
549 @emph{Target Visium options:}
550 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset XTENSA
553
554 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
555 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
556 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
557 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
558 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
559 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset Z80
562
563 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
564 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
565 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
566 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
567 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
568 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
569 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
570 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset Z8000
573
574 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576
577 @c man end
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @c man begin OPTIONS
581
582 @table @gcctabopt
583 @include at-file.texi
584
585 @item -a[cdghlmns]
586 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @item -ac
590 omit false conditionals
591
592 @item -ad
593 omit debugging directives
594
595 @item -ag
596 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
597
598 @item -ah
599 include high-level source
600
601 @item -al
602 include assembly
603
604 @item -am
605 include macro expansions
606
607 @item -an
608 omit forms processing
609
610 @item -as
611 include symbols
612
613 @item =file
614 set the name of the listing file
615 @end table
616
617 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
618 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
619 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
620
621 @item --alternate
622 Begin in alternate macro mode.
623 @ifclear man
624 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
625 @end ifclear
626
627 @item --compress-debug-sections
628 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
629 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
630 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
631 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
632
633 @ifset ELF
634 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
635 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
636 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
637 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
638 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
639 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
640 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
641 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
642 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
643 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
644 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
645 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
646 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
647 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
648 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
649
650 @end ifset
651
652 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
653 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
654
655 @item -D
656 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
657 other assemblers.
658
659 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
660 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
661 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
662
663 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
664 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
665 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
666 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
667 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
668 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
669
670 @item -f
671 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
672 compiler output).
673
674 @item -g
675 @itemx --gen-debug
676 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
677 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
678 ECOFF or DWARF2.
679
680 @item --gstabs
681 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
682 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
683
684 @item --gstabs+
685 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
686 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
687 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
688 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
689 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
690
691 @item --gdwarf-2
692 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
693 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
694 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
695
696 @item --gdwarf-sections
697 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
698 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
699 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
700 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
701 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
702 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
703 suffix.
704
705 @item --size-check=error
706 @itemx --size-check=warning
707 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
708
709 @item --help
710 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
711
712 @item --target-help
713 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
714
715 @item -I @var{dir}
716 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
717
718 @item -J
719 Don't warn about signed overflow.
720
721 @item -K
722 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
723 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
724 @end ifclear
725 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
726 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
727 @end ifset
728
729 @item -L
730 @itemx --keep-locals
731 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
732 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
733 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
734 @ifclear man
735 @xref{Symbol Names}.
736 @end ifclear
737
738 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
739 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
740 listing to @var{number}.
741
742 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
743 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
744 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
745
746 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
747 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
748 @var{number} bytes.
749
750 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
751 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
752 to @var{number} + 1.
753
754 @item -o @var{objfile}
755 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
756
757 @item -R
758 Fold the data section into the text section.
759
760 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
761 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
762 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
763 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
764 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
765 requirements at the expense of speed.
766
767 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
768 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
769 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
770 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
771
772 @ifset ELF
773 @item --sectname-subst
774 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
775 @ifclear man
776 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
777 @end ifclear
778 @end ifset
779
780 @item --statistics
781 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
782 assembly.
783
784 @item --strip-local-absolute
785 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
786
787 @item -v
788 @itemx -version
789 Print the @command{as} version.
790
791 @item --version
792 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
793
794 @item -W
795 @itemx --no-warn
796 Suppress warning messages.
797
798 @item --fatal-warnings
799 Treat warnings as errors.
800
801 @item --warn
802 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
803
804 @item -w
805 Ignored.
806
807 @item -x
808 Ignored.
809
810 @item -Z
811 Generate an object file even after errors.
812
813 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
814 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
815
816 @end table
817 @c man end
818
819 @ifset AARCH64
820
821 @ifclear man
822 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
823 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
824 @end ifclear
825
826 @ifset man
827 @c man begin OPTIONS
828 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
829 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
830 @c man end
831 @c man begin INCLUDE
832 @include c-aarch64.texi
833 @c ended inside the included file
834 @end ifset
835
836 @end ifset
837
838 @ifset ALPHA
839
840 @ifclear man
841 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
842 for an Alpha processor.
843 @end ifclear
844
845 @ifset man
846 @c man begin OPTIONS
847 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
848 processor.
849 @c man end
850 @c man begin INCLUDE
851 @include c-alpha.texi
852 @c ended inside the included file
853 @end ifset
854
855 @end ifset
856
857 @c man begin OPTIONS
858 @ifset ARC
859 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
860 an ARC processor.
861
862 @table @gcctabopt
863 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
864 This option selects the core processor variant.
865 @item -EB | -EL
866 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
867 @end table
868 @end ifset
869
870 @ifset ARM
871 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
872 processor family.
873
874 @table @gcctabopt
875 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
876 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
877 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
878 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
879 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
880 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
881 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
882 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
883 @item -mthumb
884 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
885 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
886 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
887 @item -EB | -EL
888 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
889 @item -mthumb-interwork
890 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
891 ARM code in mind.
892 @item -mccs
893 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
894 @item -k
895 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
896 @end table
897 @end ifset
898 @c man end
899
900 @ifset Blackfin
901
902 @ifclear man
903 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
904 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
905 @end ifclear
906
907 @ifset man
908 @c man begin OPTIONS
909 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
910 the Blackfin processor family.
911 @c man end
912 @c man begin INCLUDE
913 @include c-bfin.texi
914 @c ended inside the included file
915 @end ifset
916
917 @end ifset
918
919 @c man begin OPTIONS
920 @ifset CRIS
921 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
922 @end ifset
923
924 @ifset D10V
925 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
926 a D10V processor.
927 @table @gcctabopt
928 @cindex D10V optimization
929 @cindex optimization, D10V
930 @item -O
931 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
932 @end table
933 @end ifset
934
935 @ifset D30V
936 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
937 processor.
938 @table @gcctabopt
939 @cindex D30V optimization
940 @cindex optimization, D30V
941 @item -O
942 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
943
944 @cindex D30V nops
945 @item -n
946 Warn when nops are generated.
947
948 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
949 @item -N
950 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
951 @end table
952 @end ifset
953 @c man end
954
955 @ifset EPIPHANY
956 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
957 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
958
959 @ifclear man
960 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
961 configured for an Epiphany processor.
962 @end ifclear
963
964 @ifset man
965 @c man begin OPTIONS
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
967 an Epiphany processor.
968 @c man end
969 @c man begin INCLUDE
970 @include c-epiphany.texi
971 @c ended inside the included file
972 @end ifset
973
974 @end ifset
975
976 @ifset H8300
977
978 @ifclear man
979 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
980 for an H8/300 processor.
981 @end ifclear
982
983 @ifset man
984 @c man begin OPTIONS
985 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
986 processor.
987 @c man end
988 @c man begin INCLUDE
989 @include c-h8300.texi
990 @c ended inside the included file
991 @end ifset
992
993 @end ifset
994
995 @ifset I80386
996
997 @ifclear man
998 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
999 configured for an i386 processor.
1000 @end ifclear
1001
1002 @ifset man
1003 @c man begin OPTIONS
1004 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1005 an i386 processor.
1006 @c man end
1007 @c man begin INCLUDE
1008 @include c-i386.texi
1009 @c ended inside the included file
1010 @end ifset
1011
1012 @end ifset
1013
1014 @c man begin OPTIONS
1015 @ifset I960
1016 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1017 Intel 80960 processor.
1018
1019 @table @gcctabopt
1020 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1021 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1022
1023 @item -b
1024 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1025
1026 @item -no-relax
1027 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1028 error if necessary.
1029
1030 @end table
1031 @end ifset
1032
1033 @ifset IP2K
1034 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1035 Ubicom IP2K series.
1036
1037 @table @gcctabopt
1038
1039 @item -mip2022ext
1040 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1041
1042 @item -mip2022
1043 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1044 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1045
1046 @end table
1047 @end ifset
1048
1049 @ifset M32C
1050 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1051 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1052
1053 @table @gcctabopt
1054
1055 @item -m32c
1056 Assemble M32C instructions.
1057
1058 @item -m16c
1059 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1060
1061 @item -relax
1062 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1063
1064 @item -h-tick-hex
1065 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1066
1067 @end table
1068 @end ifset
1069
1070 @ifset M32R
1071 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1072 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1073
1074 @table @gcctabopt
1075
1076 @item --m32rx
1077 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1078 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1079
1080 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1081 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1082 encountered.
1083
1084 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1085 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1086 encountered.
1087
1088 @end table
1089 @end ifset
1090
1091 @ifset M680X0
1092 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1093 Motorola 68000 series.
1094
1095 @table @gcctabopt
1096
1097 @item -l
1098 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1099
1100 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1101 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1102 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1103 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1104 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1105
1106 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1107 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1108 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1109 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1110 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1111 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1112
1113 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1114 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1115 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1116
1117 @end table
1118 @end ifset
1119
1120 @ifset NIOSII
1121
1122 @ifclear man
1123 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1124 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1125 @end ifclear
1126
1127 @ifset man
1128 @c man begin OPTIONS
1129 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1130 Altera Nios II processor.
1131 @c man end
1132 @c man begin INCLUDE
1133 @include c-nios2.texi
1134 @c ended inside the included file
1135 @end ifset
1136 @end ifset
1137
1138 @ifset PDP11
1139
1140 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1141 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1142
1143 @table @gcctabopt
1144 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1145 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1146 default is @option{-mpic}.
1147
1148 @item -mall
1149 @itemx -mall-extensions
1150 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1151
1152 @item -mno-extensions
1153 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1154
1155 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1156 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1157
1158 @item -m@var{cpu}
1159 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1160 disable all other extensions.
1161
1162 @item -m@var{machine}
1163 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1164 model, and disable all other extensions.
1165 @end table
1166
1167 @end ifset
1168
1169 @ifset PJ
1170 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1171 a picoJava processor.
1172
1173 @table @gcctabopt
1174
1175 @cindex PJ endianness
1176 @cindex endianness, PJ
1177 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1178 @item -mb
1179 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1180
1181 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1182 @item -ml
1183 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1184
1185 @end table
1186 @end ifset
1187
1188 @ifset M68HC11
1189 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1190 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1191
1192 @table @gcctabopt
1193
1194 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1195 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1196 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1197
1198 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1199 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1200 XGATE address space.
1201
1202 @item -mshort
1203 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1204
1205 @item -mlong
1206 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1207
1208 @item -mshort-double
1209 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1210
1211 @item -mlong-double
1212 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1213
1214 @item --force-long-branches
1215 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1216 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1217 sub routine.
1218
1219 @item -S | --short-branches
1220 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1221 when the offset is out of range.
1222
1223 @item --strict-direct-mode
1224 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1225 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1226
1227 @item --print-insn-syntax
1228 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1229
1230 @item --print-opcodes
1231 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1232
1233 @item --generate-example
1234 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1235 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1236
1237 @end table
1238 @end ifset
1239
1240 @ifset SPARC
1241 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1242 for the SPARC architecture:
1243
1244 @table @gcctabopt
1245 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1246 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1247 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1248
1249 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1250 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1251
1252 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1253 UltraSPARC extensions.
1254
1255 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1256 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1257 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1258
1259 @item -bump
1260 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1261 @end table
1262 @end ifset
1263
1264 @ifset TIC54X
1265 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1266 architecture.
1267
1268 @table @gcctabopt
1269 @item -mfar-mode
1270 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1271 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1272 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1273 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1274 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1275 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1276 behaviour in the shell.
1277 @end table
1278 @end ifset
1279
1280 @ifset MIPS
1281 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1282 a MIPS processor.
1283
1284 @table @gcctabopt
1285 @item -G @var{num}
1286 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1287 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1288 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1289
1290 @cindex MIPS endianness
1291 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1292 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1293 @item -EB
1294 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1295
1296 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1297 @item -EL
1298 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1299
1300 @cindex MIPS ISA
1301 @item -mips1
1302 @itemx -mips2
1303 @itemx -mips3
1304 @itemx -mips4
1305 @itemx -mips5
1306 @itemx -mips32
1307 @itemx -mips32r2
1308 @itemx -mips32r3
1309 @itemx -mips32r5
1310 @itemx -mips32r6
1311 @itemx -mips64
1312 @itemx -mips64r2
1313 @itemx -mips64r3
1314 @itemx -mips64r5
1315 @itemx -mips64r6
1316 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1317 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1318 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1319 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1320 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1321 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1322 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1323 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1324 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1325 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1326
1327 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1328 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1329
1330 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1331 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1332
1333 @item -mfix7000
1334 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1335 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1336 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1337
1338 @item -mfix-rm7000
1339 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1340 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1341 followed by a load instruction.
1342
1343 @item -mdebug
1344 @itemx -no-mdebug
1345 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1346 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1347
1348 @item -mpdr
1349 @itemx -mno-pdr
1350 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1351
1352 @item -mgp32
1353 @itemx -mfp32
1354 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1355 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1356 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1357 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1358
1359 @item -mgp64
1360 @itemx -mfp64
1361 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1362 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1363 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1364 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1365
1366 @item -mfpxx
1367 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1368 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1369 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1370 32 or 64 bits wide.
1371
1372 @item -modd-spreg
1373 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1374 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1375 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1376 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1377
1378 @item -mips16
1379 @itemx -no-mips16
1380 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1381 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1382 turns off this option.
1383
1384 @item -mmicromips
1385 @itemx -mno-micromips
1386 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1387 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1388 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1389 at the start of the assembly file.
1390
1391 @item -msmartmips
1392 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1393 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1394 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1395 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1396
1397 @item -mips3d
1398 @itemx -no-mips3d
1399 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1400 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1401 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1402
1403 @item -mdmx
1404 @itemx -no-mdmx
1405 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1406 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1407 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1408
1409 @item -mdsp
1410 @itemx -mno-dsp
1411 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1412 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1413 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1414
1415 @item -mdspr2
1416 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1417 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1418 This option implies -mdsp.
1419 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1420 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1421
1422 @item -mmsa
1423 @itemx -mno-msa
1424 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1425 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1426 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1427
1428 @item -mxpa
1429 @itemx -mno-xpa
1430 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1431 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1432 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1433
1434 @item -mmt
1435 @itemx -mno-mt
1436 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1437 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1438 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1439
1440 @item -mmcu
1441 @itemx -mno-mcu
1442 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1443 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1444 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1445
1446 @item -minsn32
1447 @itemx -mno-insn32
1448 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1449 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1450 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1451 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1452 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1453 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1454 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1455
1456 @item --construct-floats
1457 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1458 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1459 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1460 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1461 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1462 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1463
1464 @item --relax-branch
1465 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1466 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1467 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1468 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1469
1470 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1471 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1472 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1473
1474 @cindex emulation
1475 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1476 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1477 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1478 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1479 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1480
1481 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1482 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1483 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1484 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1485 preferred options instead.
1486
1487 @item -nocpp
1488 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1489 the native tools.
1490
1491 @item --trap
1492 @itemx --no-trap
1493 @itemx --break
1494 @itemx --no-break
1495 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1496 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1497 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1498 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1499 break exception.
1500
1501 @item -n
1502 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1503 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1504 @end table
1505 @end ifset
1506
1507 @ifset MCORE
1508 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1509 an MCore processor.
1510
1511 @table @gcctabopt
1512 @item -jsri2bsr
1513 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1514 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1515 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1516
1517 @item -sifilter
1518 @itemx -nosifilter
1519 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1520 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1521
1522 @item -relax
1523 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1524
1525 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1526 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1527 can be assembled.
1528
1529 @item -EB
1530 Assemble for a big endian target.
1531
1532 @item -EL
1533 Assemble for a little endian target.
1534
1535 @end table
1536 @end ifset
1537 @c man end
1538
1539 @ifset METAG
1540
1541 @ifclear man
1542 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1543 for a Meta processor.
1544 @end ifclear
1545
1546 @ifset man
1547 @c man begin OPTIONS
1548 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1549 Meta processor.
1550 @c man end
1551 @c man begin INCLUDE
1552 @include c-metag.texi
1553 @c ended inside the included file
1554 @end ifset
1555
1556 @end ifset
1557
1558 @c man begin OPTIONS
1559 @ifset MMIX
1560 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1561 @end ifset
1562
1563 @ifset NDS32
1564
1565 @ifclear man
1566 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1567 for a NDS32 processor.
1568 @end ifclear
1569 @c ended inside the included file
1570 @end ifset
1571
1572 @ifset man
1573 @c man begin OPTIONS
1574 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1575 NDS32 processor.
1576 @c man end
1577 @c man begin INCLUDE
1578 @include c-nds32.texi
1579 @c ended inside the included file
1580 @end ifset
1581
1582 @c man end
1583 @ifset PPC
1584
1585 @ifclear man
1586 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1587 for a PowerPC processor.
1588 @end ifclear
1589
1590 @ifset man
1591 @c man begin OPTIONS
1592 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1593 PowerPC processor.
1594 @c man end
1595 @c man begin INCLUDE
1596 @include c-ppc.texi
1597 @c ended inside the included file
1598 @end ifset
1599
1600 @end ifset
1601
1602 @c man begin OPTIONS
1603 @ifset RX
1604 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1605 @end ifset
1606
1607 @ifset S390
1608 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1609 processor family.
1610
1611 @table @gcctabopt
1612 @item -m31
1613 @itemx -m64
1614 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1615 @item -mesa
1616 @item -mzarch
1617 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1618 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1619 @item -march=@var{processor}
1620 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1621 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1622 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1623 @item -mregnames
1624 @itemx -mno-regnames
1625 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1626 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1627 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1628 but evaluates to zero.
1629 @end table
1630 @end ifset
1631 @c man end
1632
1633 @ifset TIC6X
1634
1635 @ifclear man
1636 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1637 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1638 @end ifclear
1639
1640 @ifset man
1641 @c man begin OPTIONS
1642 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1643 TMS320C6000 processor.
1644 @c man end
1645 @c man begin INCLUDE
1646 @include c-tic6x.texi
1647 @c ended inside the included file
1648 @end ifset
1649
1650 @end ifset
1651
1652 @ifset TILEGX
1653
1654 @ifclear man
1655 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1656 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1657 @end ifclear
1658
1659 @ifset man
1660 @c man begin OPTIONS
1661 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1662 processor.
1663 @c man end
1664 @c man begin INCLUDE
1665 @include c-tilegx.texi
1666 @c ended inside the included file
1667 @end ifset
1668
1669 @end ifset
1670
1671 @ifset VISIUM
1672
1673 @ifclear man
1674 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1675 for a Visium processor.
1676 @end ifclear
1677
1678 @ifset man
1679 @c man begin OPTIONS
1680 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1681 processor.
1682 @c man end
1683 @c man begin INCLUDE
1684 @include c-visium.texi
1685 @c ended inside the included file
1686 @end ifset
1687
1688 @end ifset
1689
1690 @ifset XTENSA
1691
1692 @ifclear man
1693 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1694 for an Xtensa processor.
1695 @end ifclear
1696
1697 @ifset man
1698 @c man begin OPTIONS
1699 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1700 Xtensa processor.
1701 @c man end
1702 @c man begin INCLUDE
1703 @include c-xtensa.texi
1704 @c ended inside the included file
1705 @end ifset
1706
1707 @end ifset
1708
1709 @c man begin OPTIONS
1710
1711 @ifset Z80
1712 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1713 a Z80 family processor.
1714 @table @gcctabopt
1715 @item -z80
1716 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1717 @item -r800
1718 Assemble for R800 processor.
1719 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1720 @itemx -Wnud
1721 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1722 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1723 @itemx -Wnup
1724 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1725 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1726 @itemx -Wud
1727 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1728 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1729 @itemx -Wup
1730 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1731 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1732 @itemx -Fud
1733 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1734 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1735 @itemx -Fup
1736 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1737 @end table
1738 @end ifset
1739
1740 @c man end
1741
1742 @menu
1743 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1744 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1745 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1746 * Command Line:: Command Line
1747 * Input Files:: Input Files
1748 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1749 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1750 @end menu
1751
1752 @node Manual
1753 @section Structure of this Manual
1754
1755 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1756 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1757 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1758 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1759 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1760
1761 @ifclear GENERIC
1762 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1763 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1764 @end ifclear
1765 @ifset GENERIC
1766 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1767 various flavors of the assembler.
1768 @end ifset
1769
1770 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1771 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1772 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1773 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1774 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1775 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1776 particular architecture.
1777 @ifset GENERIC
1778 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1779 machine architecture manual for this information.
1780 @end ifset
1781 @ifclear GENERIC
1782 @ifset H8/300
1783 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1784 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1785 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1786 @end ifset
1787 @ifset SH
1788 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1789 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1790 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1791 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1792 @end ifset
1793 @ifset Z8000
1794 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1795 @end ifset
1796 @end ifclear
1797
1798 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1799 @ignore
1800 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1801 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1802 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1803 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1804 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1805 qualification.
1806
1807 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1808 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1809 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1810 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1811 @end ignore
1812
1813 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1814 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1815 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1816 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1817 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1818 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1819 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1820 @c directives).
1821
1822 @node GNU Assembler
1823 @section The GNU Assembler
1824
1825 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1826
1827 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1828 @ifclear GENERIC
1829 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1830 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1831 @end ifclear
1832 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1833 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1834 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1835 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1836 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1837
1838 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1839 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1840 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1841 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1842 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1843 machine would assemble.
1844 @ifset VAX
1845 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1846 @end ifset
1847 @ifset M680X0
1848 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1849 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1850 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1851 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1852 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1853 @end ifset
1854
1855 @c man end
1856
1857 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1858 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1859 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1860
1861 @node Object Formats
1862 @section Object File Formats
1863
1864 @cindex object file format
1865 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1866 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1867 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1868 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1869 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1870 @ifclear GENERIC
1871 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1872 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1873 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1874 @end ifclear
1875 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1876 @ifset I960
1877 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1878 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1879 @end ifset
1880 @ifset HPPA
1881 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1882 SOM or ELF format object files.
1883 @end ifset
1884 @end ifclear
1885
1886 @node Command Line
1887 @section Command Line
1888
1889 @cindex command line conventions
1890
1891 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1892 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1893 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1894 significant.
1895
1896 @cindex standard input, as input file
1897 @kindex --
1898 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1899 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1900
1901 @cindex options, command line
1902 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1903 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1904 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1905 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1906 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1907
1908 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1909 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1910 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1911 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1912
1913 @smallexample
1914 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1915 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1916 @end smallexample
1917
1918 @node Input Files
1919 @section Input Files
1920
1921 @cindex input
1922 @cindex source program
1923 @cindex files, input
1924 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1925 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1926 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1927 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1928
1929 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1930 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1931 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1932 order specified.
1933
1934 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1935 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1936 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1937 (The standard input is also a file.)
1938
1939 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1940 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1941 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1942 is taken to be an input file name.
1943
1944 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1945 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1946 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1947 to assemble.
1948
1949 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1950 in your command line.
1951
1952 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1953 file.
1954
1955 @c man end
1956
1957 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1958
1959 @cindex input file linenumbers
1960 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1961 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1962 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1963 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1964 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1965
1966 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1967 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1968
1969 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1970 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1971 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1972 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1973 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1974 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1975
1976 @node Object
1977 @section Output (Object) File
1978
1979 @cindex object file
1980 @cindex output file
1981 @kindex a.out
1982 @kindex .o
1983 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1984 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1985 is the object file. Its default name is
1986 @ifclear BOUT
1987 @code{a.out}.
1988 @end ifclear
1989 @ifset BOUT
1990 @ifset GENERIC
1991 @code{a.out}, or
1992 @end ifset
1993 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1994 @end ifset
1995 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1996 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1997 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1998 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1999 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2000
2001 @cindex linker
2002 @kindex ld
2003 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2004 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2005 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2006 information for the debugger.
2007
2008 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2009 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2010
2011 @node Errors
2012 @section Error and Warning Messages
2013
2014 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2015
2016 @cindex error messages
2017 @cindex warning messages
2018 @cindex messages from assembler
2019 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2020 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2021 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2022 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2023 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2024
2025 @c man end
2026
2027 @cindex format of warning messages
2028 Warning messages have the format
2029
2030 @smallexample
2031 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2032 @end smallexample
2033
2034 @noindent
2035 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2036 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2037 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2038 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2039 @ifset GENERIC
2040 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2041 @end ifset
2042 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2043 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2044 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2045 tradition).
2046
2047 @cindex format of error messages
2048 Error messages have the format
2049 @smallexample
2050 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2051 @end smallexample
2052 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2053 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2054 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2055
2056 @node Invoking
2057 @chapter Command-Line Options
2058
2059 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2060 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2061 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2062 for options specific
2063 @ifclear GENERIC
2064 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2065 @end ifclear
2066 @ifset GENERIC
2067 to particular machine architectures.
2068 @end ifset
2069
2070 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2071
2072 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2073 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2074 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2075 by commas. For example:
2076
2077 @smallexample
2078 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2079 @end smallexample
2080
2081 @noindent
2082 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2083 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2084 local symbols in the symbol table).
2085
2086 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2087 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2088 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2089 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2090 assembler.)
2091
2092 @c man end
2093
2094 @menu
2095 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2096 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2097 * D:: -D for compatibility
2098 * f:: -f to work faster
2099 * I:: -I for .include search path
2100 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2101 * K:: -K for compatibility
2102 @end ifclear
2103 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2104 * K:: -K for difference tables
2105 @end ifset
2106
2107 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2108 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2109 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2110 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2111 * o:: -o to name the object file
2112 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2113 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2114 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2115 * v:: -v to announce version
2116 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2117 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2118 @end menu
2119
2120 @node a
2121 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2122
2123 @kindex -a
2124 @kindex -ac
2125 @kindex -ad
2126 @kindex -ag
2127 @kindex -ah
2128 @kindex -al
2129 @kindex -an
2130 @kindex -as
2131 @cindex listings, enabling
2132 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2133
2134 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2135 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2136 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2137 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2138 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2139 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2140 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2141 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2142 also.
2143
2144 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2145 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2146
2147 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2148 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2149 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2150 omitted from the listing.
2151
2152 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2153 listing.
2154
2155 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2156 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2157 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2158 @code{.sbttl}.
2159 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2160 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2161 listing-control directives have no effect.
2162
2163 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2164 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2165
2166 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2167 because it
2168 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2169 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2170 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2171 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2172 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2173
2174 @node alternate
2175 @section @option{--alternate}
2176
2177 @kindex --alternate
2178 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2179
2180 @node D
2181 @section @option{-D}
2182
2183 @kindex -D
2184 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2185 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2186 @command{@value{AS}}.
2187
2188 @node f
2189 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2190
2191 @kindex -f
2192 @cindex trusted compiler
2193 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2194 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2195 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2196 and comment preprocessing on
2197 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2198 ,Preprocessing}.
2199
2200 @quotation
2201 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2202 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2203 not work correctly.
2204 @end quotation
2205
2206 @node I
2207 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2208
2209 @kindex -I @var{path}
2210 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2211 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2212 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2213 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2214 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2215 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2216 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2217 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2218 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2219 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2220
2221 @node K
2222 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2223
2224 @kindex -K
2225 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2226 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2227 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2228 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2229 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2230 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2231 alteration on other platforms.
2232 @end ifclear
2233
2234 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2235 @cindex difference tables, warning
2236 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2237 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2238 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2239 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2240 is done.
2241 @end ifset
2242
2243 @node L
2244 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2245
2246 @kindex -L
2247 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2248 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2249 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2250 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2251 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2252 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2253 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2254 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2255
2256 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2257 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2258 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2259
2260 @node listing
2261 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2262
2263 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2264 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2265 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2266 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2267 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2268 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2269 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2270 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2271
2272 @table @gcctabopt
2273 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2274 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2275 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2276 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2277 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2278
2279 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2280 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2281 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2282 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2283 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2284 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2285 switch is used the default is to one.
2286
2287 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2288 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2289 @cindex Width of source line output
2290 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2291 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2292 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2293
2294 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2295 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2296 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2297 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2298 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2299 @end table
2300
2301 @node M
2302 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2303
2304 @kindex -M
2305 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2306 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2307 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2308 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2309 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2310 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2311 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2312 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2313 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2314
2315 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2316 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2317 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2318 individually. These are:
2319
2320 @itemize @bullet
2321 @item global symbols in common section
2322
2323 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2324 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2325 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2326 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2327 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2328
2329 @item complex relocations
2330
2331 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2332 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2333 are not support by other object file formats.
2334
2335 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2336
2337 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2338 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2339 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2340 script.
2341
2342 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2343
2344 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2345 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2346
2347 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2348
2349 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2350 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2351 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2352 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2353 assigned within a linker script.
2354 @end itemize
2355
2356 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2357 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2358 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2359
2360 @itemize @bullet
2361
2362 @item EBCDIC strings
2363
2364 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2365
2366 @item packed binary coded decimal
2367
2368 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2369 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2370
2371 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2372
2373 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2374
2375 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2376
2377 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2378
2379 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2380
2381 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2382 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2383 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2384 these options serve no purpose.
2385
2386 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2387
2388 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2389 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2390 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2391
2392 @item other @code{OPT} options
2393
2394 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2395 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2396
2397 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2398
2399 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2400 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2401
2402 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2403
2404 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2405
2406 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2407
2408 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2409
2410 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2411
2412 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2413
2414 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2415
2416 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2417
2418 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2419
2420 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2421
2422 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2423
2424 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2425
2426 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2427
2428 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2429
2430 @end itemize
2431
2432 @node MD
2433 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2434
2435 @kindex --MD
2436 @cindex dependency tracking
2437 @cindex make rules
2438
2439 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2440 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2441 dependencies of the main source file.
2442
2443 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2444
2445 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2446
2447 @node o
2448 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2449
2450 @kindex -o
2451 @cindex naming object file
2452 @cindex object file name
2453 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2454 default it has the name
2455 @ifset GENERIC
2456 @ifset I960
2457 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2458 @end ifset
2459 @ifclear I960
2460 @file{a.out}.
2461 @end ifclear
2462 @end ifset
2463 @ifclear GENERIC
2464 @ifset I960
2465 @file{b.out}.
2466 @end ifset
2467 @ifclear I960
2468 @file{a.out}.
2469 @end ifclear
2470 @end ifclear
2471 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2472 object file a different name.
2473
2474 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2475 existing file of the same name.
2476
2477 @node R
2478 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2479
2480 @kindex -R
2481 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2482 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2483 @cindex joining text and data sections
2484 @cindex merging text and data sections
2485 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2486 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2487 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2488 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2489 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2490 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2491
2492 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2493 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2494 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2495 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2496
2497 @ifset COFF-ELF
2498 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2499 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2500 @samp{.data}.
2501 @end ifset
2502
2503 @ifset HPPA
2504 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2505 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2506 @end ifset
2507
2508 @node statistics
2509 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2510
2511 @kindex --statistics
2512 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2513 @cindex time, total for assembly
2514 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2515 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2516 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2517 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2518 seconds).
2519
2520 @node traditional-format
2521 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2522
2523 @kindex --traditional-format
2524 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2525 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2526 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2527
2528 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2529 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2530
2531 @node v
2532 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2533
2534 @kindex -v
2535 @kindex -version
2536 @cindex assembler version
2537 @cindex version of assembler
2538 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2539 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2540 command line.
2541
2542 @node W
2543 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2544
2545 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2546 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2547 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2548 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2549
2550 @kindex -W
2551 @kindex --no-warn
2552 @cindex suppressing warnings
2553 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2554 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2555 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2556 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2557 are still reported.
2558
2559 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2560 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2561 @cindex warnings, causing error
2562 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2563 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2564
2565 @kindex --warn
2566 @cindex warnings, switching on
2567 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2568 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2569
2570 @node Z
2571 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2572 @cindex object file, after errors
2573 @cindex errors, continuing after
2574 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2575 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2576 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2577 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2578 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2579 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2580
2581 @node Syntax
2582 @chapter Syntax
2583
2584 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2585 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2586 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2587 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2588 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2589 @ifclear VAX
2590 assembler.
2591 @end ifclear
2592 @ifset VAX
2593 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2594 @end ifset
2595
2596 @menu
2597 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2598 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2599 * Comments:: Comments
2600 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2601 * Statements:: Statements
2602 * Constants:: Constants
2603 @end menu
2604
2605 @node Preprocessing
2606 @section Preprocessing
2607
2608 @cindex preprocessing
2609 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2610 @itemize @bullet
2611 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2612 @item
2613 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2614 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2615 a single space.
2616
2617 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2618 @item
2619 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2620 appropriate number of newlines.
2621
2622 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2623 @item
2624 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2625 @end itemize
2626
2627 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2628 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2629 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2630 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2631 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2632 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2633 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2634
2635 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2636 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2637 preprocessed.
2638
2639 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2640 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2641 @kindex #NO_APP
2642 @kindex #APP
2643 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2644 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2645 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2646 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2647 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2648 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2649 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2650 and whitespace.
2651
2652 @node Whitespace
2653 @section Whitespace
2654
2655 @cindex whitespace
2656 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2657 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2658 people to read. Unless within character constants
2659 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2660 as exactly one space.
2661
2662 @node Comments
2663 @section Comments
2664
2665 @cindex comments
2666 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2667 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2668
2669 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2670 This means you may not nest these comments.
2671
2672 @smallexample
2673 /*
2674 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2675 is to use this sort of comment.
2676 */
2677
2678 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2679 @end smallexample
2680
2681 @cindex line comment character
2682 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2683 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2684 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2685 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2686 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2687 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2688 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2689 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2690
2691 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2692 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2693 to specify logical line numbers:
2694
2695 @kindex #
2696 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2697 @cindex logical line numbers
2698 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2699 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2700 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2701 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2702 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2703
2704 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2705 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2706
2707 @smallexample
2708 # This is an ordinary comment.
2709 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2710 # This is logical line # 36.
2711 @end smallexample
2712 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2713 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2714
2715 @node Symbol Intro
2716 @section Symbols
2717
2718 @cindex characters used in symbols
2719 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2720 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2721 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2722 @samp{_.$}.
2723 @end ifclear
2724 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2725 @ifclear GENERIC
2726 @ifset H8
2727 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2728 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2729 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2730 symbol names.)
2731 @end ifset
2732 @end ifclear
2733 @end ifset
2734 @ifset GENERIC
2735 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2736 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2737 @end ifset
2738 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2739 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2740 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2741 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2742 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2743 @cindex length of symbols
2744
2745 @node Statements
2746 @section Statements
2747
2748 @cindex statements, structure of
2749 @cindex line separator character
2750 @cindex statement separator character
2751
2752 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2753 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2754 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2755 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2756 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2757 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2758 exception: they do not end statements.
2759
2760 @cindex newline, required at file end
2761 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2762 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2763 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2764
2765 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2766
2767 @cindex instructions and directives
2768 @cindex directives and instructions
2769 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2770 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2771 @c 13feb91.
2772 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2773 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2774 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2775 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2776 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2777 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2778 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2779 @ifset GENERIC
2780 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2781 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2782 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2783 language.@refill
2784 @end ifset
2785
2786 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2787 @cindex label (@code{:})
2788 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2789 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2790 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2791
2792 @ifset HPPA
2793 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2794 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2795 only one label may be defined on each line.
2796 @end ifset
2797
2798 @smallexample
2799 label: .directive followed by something
2800 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2801 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2802 @end smallexample
2803
2804 @node Constants
2805 @section Constants
2806
2807 @cindex constants
2808 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2809 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2810 @smallexample
2811 @group
2812 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2813 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2814 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2815 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2816 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2817 @end group
2818 @end smallexample
2819
2820 @menu
2821 * Characters:: Character Constants
2822 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2823 @end menu
2824
2825 @node Characters
2826 @subsection Character Constants
2827
2828 @cindex character constants
2829 @cindex constants, character
2830 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2831 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2832 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2833 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2834 used in arithmetic expressions.
2835
2836 @menu
2837 * Strings:: Strings
2838 * Chars:: Characters
2839 @end menu
2840
2841 @node Strings
2842 @subsubsection Strings
2843
2844 @cindex string constants
2845 @cindex constants, string
2846 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2847 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2848 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2849 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2850 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2851 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2852 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2853 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2854
2855 @cindex escape codes, character
2856 @cindex character escape codes
2857 @table @kbd
2858 @c @item \a
2859 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2860 @c
2861 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2862 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2863 @item \b
2864 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2865
2866 @c @item \e
2867 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2868 @c
2869 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2870 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2871 @item \f
2872 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2873
2874 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2875 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2876 @item \n
2877 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2878
2879 @c @item \p
2880 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2881 @c
2882 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2883 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2884 @item \r
2885 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2886
2887 @c @item \s
2888 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2889 @c other assemblers.
2890 @c
2891 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2892 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2893 @item \t
2894 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2895
2896 @c @item \v
2897 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2898 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2899 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2900 @c
2901 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2902 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2903 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2904 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2905 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2906 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2907
2908 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2909 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2910 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2911 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2912 lower case @code{x} works.
2913
2914 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2915 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2916 @item \\
2917 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2918
2919 @c @item \'
2920 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2921 @c This is needed in single character literals
2922 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2923 @c a @samp{'}.
2924 @c
2925 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2926 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2927 @item \"
2928 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2929 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2930
2931 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2932 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2933 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2934 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2935 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2936 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2937 code and warns you of the fact.
2938 @end table
2939
2940 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2941 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2942 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2943 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2944 sequence.
2945
2946 @node Chars
2947 @subsubsection Characters
2948
2949 @cindex single character constant
2950 @cindex character, single
2951 @cindex constant, single character
2952 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2953 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2954 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2955 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2956 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2957 grave accent. A newline
2958 @ifclear GENERIC
2959 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2960 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2961 @end ifclear
2962 @ifset abnormal-separator
2963 @ifset H8
2964 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2965 Renesas SH)
2966 @end ifset
2967 @end ifset
2968 @end ifclear
2969 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2970 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2971 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2972 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2973 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2974
2975 @node Numbers
2976 @subsection Number Constants
2977
2978 @cindex constants, number
2979 @cindex number constants
2980 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2981 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2982 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2983 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2984 are floating point numbers, described below.
2985
2986 @menu
2987 * Integers:: Integers
2988 * Bignums:: Bignums
2989 * Flonums:: Flonums
2990 @ifclear GENERIC
2991 @ifset I960
2992 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2993 @end ifset
2994 @end ifclear
2995 @end menu
2996
2997 @node Integers
2998 @subsubsection Integers
2999 @cindex integers
3000 @cindex constants, integer
3001
3002 @cindex binary integers
3003 @cindex integers, binary
3004 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3005 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3006
3007 @cindex octal integers
3008 @cindex integers, octal
3009 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3010 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3011
3012 @cindex decimal integers
3013 @cindex integers, decimal
3014 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3015 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3016
3017 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3018 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3019 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3020 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3021
3022 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3023 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3024 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3025
3026 @node Bignums
3027 @subsubsection Bignums
3028
3029 @cindex bignums
3030 @cindex constants, bignum
3031 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3032 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3033 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3034 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3035
3036 @node Flonums
3037 @subsubsection Flonums
3038 @cindex flonums
3039 @cindex floating point numbers
3040 @cindex constants, floating point
3041
3042 @cindex precision, floating point
3043 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3044 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3045 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3046 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3047 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3048 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3049
3050 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3051 @itemize @bullet
3052 @item
3053 The digit @samp{0}.
3054 @ifset HPPA
3055 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3056 @end ifset
3057
3058 @item
3059 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3060 @ifset GENERIC
3061 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3062 @ignore
3063 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3064 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3065 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3066 @end ignore
3067
3068 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3069 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3070 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3071
3072 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3073 (in upper or lower case).
3074
3075 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3076 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3077
3078 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3079 @end ifset
3080 @ifclear GENERIC
3081 @ifset ARC
3082 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3083 @end ifset
3084 @ifset H8
3085 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3086 @end ifset
3087 @ifset HPPA
3088 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3089 @end ifset
3090 @ifset I960
3091 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3092 @end ifset
3093 @end ifclear
3094
3095 @item
3096 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3097
3098 @item
3099 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3100
3101 @item
3102 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3103 or more decimal digits.
3104
3105 @item
3106 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3107
3108 @itemize @bullet
3109 @item
3110 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3111 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3112 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3113 @item
3114 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3115 @item
3116 One or more decimal digits.
3117 @end itemize
3118
3119 @end itemize
3120
3121 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3122 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3123
3124 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3125 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3126 @command{@value{AS}}.
3127
3128 @ifclear GENERIC
3129 @ifset I960
3130 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3131 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3132 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3133 @node Bit Fields
3134 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3135
3136 @cindex bit fields
3137 @cindex constants, bit field
3138 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3139 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3140 @example
3141 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3142 @end example
3143 @noindent
3144 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3145 @var{value}.
3146
3147 The resulting number is then packed
3148 @ifset GENERIC
3149 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3150 (in host-dependent byte order)
3151 @end ifset
3152 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3153 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3154 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3155 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3156 least significant digits.@refill
3157
3158 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3159 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3160 @end ifset
3161 @end ifclear
3162
3163 @node Sections
3164 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3165 @cindex sections
3166 @cindex relocation
3167
3168 @menu
3169 * Secs Background:: Background
3170 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3171 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3172 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3173 * bss:: bss Section
3174 @end menu
3175
3176 @node Secs Background
3177 @section Background
3178
3179 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3180 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3181 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3182
3183 @cindex linker, and assembler
3184 @cindex assembler, and linker
3185 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3186 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3187 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3188 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3189 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3190 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3191 sections.
3192
3193 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3194 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3195 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3196 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3197 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3198 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3199 the proper run-time addresses.
3200 @ifset H8
3201 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3202 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3203 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3204 @end ifset
3205
3206 @cindex standard assembler sections
3207 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3208 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3209 @dfn{bss} sections.
3210
3211 @ifset COFF-ELF
3212 @ifset GENERIC
3213 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3214 @end ifset
3215 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3216 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3217 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3218 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3219 @end ifset
3220
3221 @ifset HPPA
3222 @ifset GENERIC
3223 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3224 @end ifset
3225 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3226 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3227 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3228 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3229 assembler directives.
3230
3231 @ifset SOM
3232 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3233 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3234 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3235 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3236 @end ifset
3237 @end ifset
3238
3239 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3240 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3241
3242 @ifset HPPA
3243 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3244 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3245 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3246 @end ifset
3247
3248 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3249 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3250 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3251 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3252 file is mentioned:
3253 @itemize @bullet
3254 @item
3255 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3256 an address?
3257 @item
3258 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3259 @item
3260 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3261 @display
3262 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3263 @end display
3264 @item
3265 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3266 @end itemize
3267
3268 @cindex addresses, format of
3269 @cindex section-relative addressing
3270 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3271 @display
3272 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3273 @end display
3274 @noindent
3275 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3276 nature.
3277 @ifset SOM
3278 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3279 symbol-relative instead.)
3280 @end ifset
3281
3282 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3283 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3284
3285 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3286 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3287 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3288 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3289 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3290 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3291 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3292 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3293 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3294
3295 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3296 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3297 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3298 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3299 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3300 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3301 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3302
3303 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3304 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3305 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3306 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3307 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3308 data and bss sections.
3309
3310 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3311 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3312
3313 @node Ld Sections
3314 @section Linker Sections
3315 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3316
3317 @table @strong
3318
3319 @ifset COFF-ELF
3320 @cindex named sections
3321 @cindex sections, named
3322 @item named sections
3323 @end ifset
3324 @ifset aout-bout
3325 @cindex text section
3326 @cindex data section
3327 @itemx text section
3328 @itemx data section
3329 @end ifset
3330 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3331 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3332 true of another.
3333 @c @ifset aout-bout
3334 When the program is running, however, it is
3335 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3336 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3337 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3338 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3339 in the data section.
3340 @c @end ifset
3341
3342 @cindex bss section
3343 @item bss section
3344 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3345 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3346 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3347 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3348 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3349 those explicit zeros from object files.
3350
3351 @cindex absolute section
3352 @item absolute section
3353 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3354 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3355 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3356 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3357
3358 @cindex undefined section
3359 @item undefined section
3360 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3361 the preceding sections.
3362 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3363 @end table
3364
3365 @cindex relocation example
3366 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3367 @ifset COFF-ELF
3368 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3369 @end ifset
3370 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3371
3372 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3373 @ifnottex
3374 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3375 @smallexample
3376 +-----+----+--+
3377 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3378 +-----+----+--+
3379
3380 text data bss
3381 seg. seg. seg.
3382
3383 +---+---+---+
3384 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3385 +---+---+---+
3386
3387 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3388 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3389 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3390
3391 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3392 @end smallexample
3393 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3394 @end ifnottex
3395 @need 5000
3396 @tex
3397 \bigskip
3398 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3399 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3400 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3401
3402 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3403 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3404 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3405
3406 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3407 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3408 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3409 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3410 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3411
3412 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3413 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3414
3415 @end tex
3416 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3417
3418 @node As Sections
3419 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3420
3421 @cindex internal assembler sections
3422 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3423 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3424 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3425 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3426 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3427 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3428 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3429 section-relative address.
3430
3431 @table @b
3432 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3433 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3434 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3435 bug in the assembler.
3436
3437 @cindex expr (internal section)
3438 @item expr section
3439 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3440 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3441 it in the expr section.
3442 @c FIXME item debug
3443 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3444 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3445 @c FIXME item register
3446 @end table
3447
3448 @node Sub-Sections
3449 @section Sub-Sections
3450
3451 @cindex numbered subsections
3452 @cindex grouping data
3453 @ifset aout-bout
3454 Assembled bytes
3455 @ifset COFF-ELF
3456 conventionally
3457 @end ifset
3458 fall into two sections: text and data.
3459 @end ifset
3460 You may have separate groups of
3461 @ifset GENERIC
3462 data in named sections
3463 @end ifset
3464 @ifclear GENERIC
3465 @ifclear aout-bout
3466 data in named sections
3467 @end ifclear
3468 @ifset aout-bout
3469 text or data
3470 @end ifset
3471 @end ifclear
3472 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3473 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3474 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3475 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3476 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3477 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3478 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3479 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3480 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3481 constants being output.
3482
3483 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3484 goes in subsection number zero.
3485
3486 @ifset GENERIC
3487 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3488 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3489 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3490 @end ifset
3491 @ifclear GENERIC
3492 @ifset H8
3493 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3494 boundary (two bytes).
3495 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3496 @end ifset
3497 @ifset I960
3498 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3499 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3500 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3501 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3502 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3503 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3504 @end ifset
3505 @end ifclear
3506
3507 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3508 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3509 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3510 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3511 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3512 data subsections as a data section.
3513
3514 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3515 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3516 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3517 @ifset COFF
3518 @ifset GENERIC
3519 When generating COFF output, you
3520 @end ifset
3521 @ifclear GENERIC
3522 You
3523 @end ifclear
3524 can also use an extra subsection
3525 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3526 @var{expression}}.
3527 @end ifset
3528 @ifset ELF
3529 @ifset GENERIC
3530 When generating ELF output, you
3531 @end ifset
3532 @ifclear GENERIC
3533 You
3534 @end ifclear
3535 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3536 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3537 @end ifset
3538 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3539 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3540 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3541 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3542 @smallexample
3543 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3544 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3545 .text 1
3546 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3547 .data 0
3548 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3549 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3550 .text 0
3551 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3552 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3553 @end smallexample
3554
3555 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3556 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3557 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3558 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3559 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3560 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3561 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3562
3563 @node bss
3564 @section bss Section
3565
3566 @cindex bss section
3567 @cindex common variable storage
3568 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3569 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3570 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3571 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3572 section are zeroed bytes.
3573
3574 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3575 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3576
3577 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3578 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3579
3580 @ifset GENERIC
3581 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3582 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3583 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3584 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3585 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3586 @end ifset
3587
3588 @node Symbols
3589 @chapter Symbols
3590
3591 @cindex symbols
3592 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3593 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3594 to debug.
3595
3596 @quotation
3597 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3598 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3599 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3600 @end quotation
3601
3602 @menu
3603 * Labels:: Labels
3604 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3605 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3606 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3607 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3608 @end menu
3609
3610 @node Labels
3611 @section Labels
3612
3613 @cindex labels
3614 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3615 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3616 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3617 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3618 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3619 definitions.
3620
3621 @ifset HPPA
3622 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3623 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3624 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3625 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3626 @end ifset
3627
3628 @node Setting Symbols
3629 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3630
3631 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3632 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3633 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3634 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3635 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3636 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3637 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3638 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3639
3640 @ifset Blackfin
3641 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3642 @end ifset
3643
3644 @node Symbol Names
3645 @section Symbol Names
3646
3647 @cindex symbol names
3648 @cindex names, symbol
3649 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3650 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3651 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3652 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3653 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3654 particular target machine), and underscores.
3655 @end ifclear
3656 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3657 @ifset H8
3658 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3659 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3660 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3661 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3662 @end ifset
3663 @end ifset
3664
3665 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3666 than @code{Foo}.
3667
3668 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3669 Local Labels. See below.
3670
3671 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3672 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3673 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3674 currently supported.
3675
3676 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3677 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3678 in a program.
3679
3680 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3681
3682 @cindex local symbol names
3683 @cindex symbol names, local
3684 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3685 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3686 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3687 set of local label prefixes.
3688 @ifset HPPA
3689 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3690 @end ifset
3691
3692 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3693 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3694 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3695 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3696
3697 @subheading Local Labels
3698
3699 @cindex local labels
3700 @cindex temporary symbol names
3701 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3702 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3703 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3704 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3705 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3706 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any positive integer). To refer
3707 to the most recent previous definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using
3708 the same number as when you defined the label. To refer to the next definition
3709 of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards''
3710 and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3711
3712 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3713 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3714 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3715 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3716 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3717 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3718 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3719
3720 Here is an example:
3721
3722 @smallexample
3723 1: branch 1f
3724 2: branch 1b
3725 1: branch 2f
3726 2: branch 1b
3727 @end smallexample
3728
3729 Which is the equivalent of:
3730
3731 @smallexample
3732 label_1: branch label_3
3733 label_2: branch label_1
3734 label_3: branch label_4
3735 label_4: branch label_3
3736 @end smallexample
3737
3738 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3739 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3740 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3741 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3742 these parts:
3743
3744 @table @code
3745 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3746 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3747 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3748 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3749 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3750 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3751 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3752 you may use them in debugging.
3753
3754 @item @var{number}
3755 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3756 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3757
3758 @item @kbd{C-B}
3759 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3760 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3761
3762 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3763 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3764 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3765 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3766 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3767 @end table
3768
3769 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3770 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3771
3772 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3773 @cindex dollar local symbols
3774
3775 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3776 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3777 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3778 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3779 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3780 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3781
3782 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3783 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3784 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3785
3786 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3787 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3788 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3789 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3790
3791 @node Dot
3792 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3793
3794 @cindex dot (symbol)
3795 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3796 @cindex current address
3797 @cindex location counter
3798 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3799 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3800 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3801 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3802 directive.
3803 @ifclear no-space-dir
3804 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3805 @samp{.space 4}.
3806 @end ifclear
3807
3808 @node Symbol Attributes
3809 @section Symbol Attributes
3810
3811 @cindex symbol attributes
3812 @cindex attributes, symbol
3813 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3814 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3815 attributes.
3816 @ifset INTERNALS
3817 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3818 @end ifset
3819
3820 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3821 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3822 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3823 would want.
3824
3825 @menu
3826 * Symbol Value:: Value
3827 * Symbol Type:: Type
3828 @ifset aout-bout
3829 @ifset GENERIC
3830 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3831 @end ifset
3832 @ifclear GENERIC
3833 @ifclear BOUT
3834 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3835 @end ifclear
3836 @ifset BOUT
3837 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3838 @end ifset
3839 @end ifclear
3840 @end ifset
3841 @ifset COFF
3842 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3843 @end ifset
3844 @ifset SOM
3845 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3846 @end ifset
3847 @end menu
3848
3849 @node Symbol Value
3850 @subsection Value
3851
3852 @cindex value of a symbol
3853 @cindex symbol value
3854 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3855 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3856 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3857 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3858 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3859 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3860 called absolute.
3861
3862 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3863 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3864 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3865 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3866 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3867 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3868 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3869 allocated storage.
3870
3871 @node Symbol Type
3872 @subsection Type
3873
3874 @cindex type of a symbol
3875 @cindex symbol type
3876 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3877 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3878 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3879 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3880
3881 @ifset aout-bout
3882 @ifclear GENERIC
3883 @ifset BOUT
3884 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3885 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3886 @need 1000
3887 @node a.out Symbols
3888 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3889
3890 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3891 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3892 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3893 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3894 @code{b.out}.
3895
3896 @end ifset
3897 @ifclear BOUT
3898 @node a.out Symbols
3899 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3900
3901 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3902 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3903
3904 @end ifclear
3905 @end ifclear
3906 @ifset GENERIC
3907 @node a.out Symbols
3908 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3909
3910 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3911 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3912
3913 @end ifset
3914 @menu
3915 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3916 * Symbol Other:: Other
3917 @end menu
3918
3919 @node Symbol Desc
3920 @subsubsection Descriptor
3921
3922 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3923 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3924 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3925 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3926 @command{@value{AS}}.
3927
3928 @node Symbol Other
3929 @subsubsection Other
3930
3931 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3932 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3933 @end ifset
3934
3935 @ifset COFF
3936 @node COFF Symbols
3937 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3938
3939 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3940 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3941
3942 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3943 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3944 @code{.endef} directives.
3945
3946 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3947
3948 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3949 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3950 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3951
3952 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3953
3954 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3955 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3956 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3957 table information for COFF.
3958 @end ifset
3959
3960 @ifset SOM
3961 @node SOM Symbols
3962 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3963
3964 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3965 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3966
3967 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3968 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3969
3970 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3971 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3972 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3973 @end ifset
3974
3975 @node Expressions
3976 @chapter Expressions
3977
3978 @cindex expressions
3979 @cindex addresses
3980 @cindex numeric values
3981 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3982 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3983
3984 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3985 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3986 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3987 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3988 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3989 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3990
3991 @menu
3992 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3993 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3994 @end menu
3995
3996 @node Empty Exprs
3997 @section Empty Expressions
3998
3999 @cindex empty expressions
4000 @cindex expressions, empty
4001 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4002 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4003 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4004 is compatible with other assemblers.
4005
4006 @node Integer Exprs
4007 @section Integer Expressions
4008
4009 @cindex integer expressions
4010 @cindex expressions, integer
4011 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4012 by @emph{operators}.
4013
4014 @menu
4015 * Arguments:: Arguments
4016 * Operators:: Operators
4017 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4018 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4019 @end menu
4020
4021 @node Arguments
4022 @subsection Arguments
4023
4024 @cindex expression arguments
4025 @cindex arguments in expressions
4026 @cindex operands in expressions
4027 @cindex arithmetic operands
4028 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4029 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4030 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4031 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4032 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4033 instruction operands.
4034
4035 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4036 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4037 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4038 integer.
4039
4040 Numbers are usually integers.
4041
4042 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4043 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4044 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4045 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4046 assemblers.
4047
4048 @cindex subexpressions
4049 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4050 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4051 operator followed by an argument.
4052
4053 @node Operators
4054 @subsection Operators
4055
4056 @cindex operators, in expressions
4057 @cindex arithmetic functions
4058 @cindex functions, in expressions
4059 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4060 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4061 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4062 whitespace.
4063
4064 @node Prefix Ops
4065 @subsection Prefix Operator
4066
4067 @cindex prefix operators
4068 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4069 one argument, which must be absolute.
4070
4071 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4072 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4073 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4074 @tex
4075 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4076 @end tex
4077
4078 @table @code
4079 @item -
4080 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4081 @item ~
4082 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4083 @end table
4084
4085 @tex
4086 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4087 @end tex
4088
4089 @node Infix Ops
4090 @subsection Infix Operators
4091
4092 @cindex infix operators
4093 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4094 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4095 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4096 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4097 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4098
4099 @enumerate
4100 @cindex operator precedence
4101 @cindex precedence of operators
4102
4103 @item
4104 Highest Precedence
4105
4106 @table @code
4107 @item *
4108 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4109
4110 @item /
4111 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4112
4113 @item %
4114 @dfn{Remainder}.
4115
4116 @item <<
4117 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4118
4119 @item >>
4120 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4121 @end table
4122
4123 @item
4124 Intermediate precedence
4125
4126 @table @code
4127 @item |
4128
4129 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4130
4131 @item &
4132 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4133
4134 @item ^
4135 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4136
4137 @item !
4138 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4139 @end table
4140
4141 @item
4142 Low Precedence
4143
4144 @table @code
4145 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4146 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4147 @cindex arguments for addition
4148 @item +
4149 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4150 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4151 sections.
4152
4153 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4154 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4155 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4156 @item -
4157 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4158 result has the section of the left argument.
4159 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4160 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4161 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4162
4163 @cindex comparison expressions
4164 @cindex expressions, comparison
4165 @item ==
4166 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4167 @item <>
4168 @itemx !=
4169 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4170 @item <
4171 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4172 @item >
4173 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4174 @item >=
4175 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4176 @item <=
4177 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4178
4179 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4180 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4181 perform signed comparisons.
4182 @end table
4183
4184 @item Lowest Precedence
4185
4186 @table @code
4187 @item &&
4188 @dfn{Logical And}.
4189
4190 @item ||
4191 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4192
4193 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4194 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4195 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4196 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4197
4198 @end table
4199 @end enumerate
4200
4201 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4202 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4203
4204 @node Pseudo Ops
4205 @chapter Assembler Directives
4206
4207 @cindex directives, machine independent
4208 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4209 @cindex machine independent directives
4210 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4211 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4212 in lower case.
4213
4214 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4215 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4216 @ifset GENERIC
4217 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4218 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4219 @end ifset
4220 @ifclear GENERIC
4221 @ifset machine-directives
4222 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4223 @end ifset
4224 @end ifclear
4225
4226 @menu
4227 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4228 @ifset COFF
4229 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4230 @end ifset
4231
4232 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4233 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4234 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4235 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4236 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4237 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4238 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4239 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4240 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4241 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4242 @ifset COFF
4243 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4244 @end ifset
4245 @ifset aout-bout
4246 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4247 @end ifset
4248 @ifset COFF
4249 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4250 @end ifset
4251
4252 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4253 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4254 * Else:: @code{.else}
4255 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4256 * End:: @code{.end}
4257 @ifset COFF
4258 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4259 @end ifset
4260
4261 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4262 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4263 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4264 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4265 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4266 * Err:: @code{.err}
4267 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4268 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4269 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4270 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4271 * File:: @code{.file}
4272 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4273 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4274 * Func:: @code{.func}
4275 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4276 @ifset ELF
4277 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4278 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4279 @end ifset
4280
4281 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4282 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4283 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4284 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4285 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4286 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4287 @ifset ELF
4288 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4289 @end ifset
4290
4291 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4292 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4293 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4294 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4295 @ifclear no-line-dir
4296 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4297 @end ifclear
4298
4299 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4300 * List:: @code{.list}
4301 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4302 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4303 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4304 @ifset ELF
4305 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4306 @end ifset
4307
4308 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4309 @ignore
4310 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4311 @end ignore
4312
4313 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4314 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4315 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4316 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4317 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4318 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4319 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4320 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4321 @ifset ELF
4322 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4323 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4324 @end ifset
4325
4326 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4327 @ifset ELF
4328 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4329 @end ifset
4330
4331 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4332 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4333 @ifset ELF
4334 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4335 @end ifset
4336
4337 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4338 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4339 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4340 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4341 @ifset COFF
4342 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4343 @end ifset
4344 @ifset COFF-ELF
4345 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4346 @end ifset
4347
4348 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4349 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4350 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4351 @ifset COFF-ELF
4352 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4353 @end ifset
4354 @ifclear no-space-dir
4355 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4356 @end ifclear
4357
4358 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4359 @ifclear no-space-dir
4360 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4361 @end ifclear
4362 @ifset have-stabs
4363 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4364 @end ifset
4365
4366 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4367 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4368 @ifset ELF
4369 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4370 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4371 @end ifset
4372
4373 @ifset COFF
4374 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4375 @end ifset
4376
4377 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4378 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4379 @ifset COFF-ELF
4380 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4381 @end ifset
4382
4383 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4384 @ifset COFF
4385 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4386 @end ifset
4387
4388 @ifset ELF
4389 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4390 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4391 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4392 @end ifset
4393
4394 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4395 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4396 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4397 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4398 @ifclear no-space-dir
4399 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4400 @end ifclear
4401 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4402 @end menu
4403
4404 @node Abort
4405 @section @code{.abort}
4406
4407 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4408 @cindex stopping the assembly
4409 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4410 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4411 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4412 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4413 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4414
4415 @ifset COFF
4416 @node ABORT (COFF)
4417 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4418
4419 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4420 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4421 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4422
4423 @ifset BOUT
4424 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4425 but ignores it.
4426 @end ifset
4427 @end ifset
4428
4429 @node Align
4430 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4431
4432 @cindex padding the location counter
4433 @cindex @code{align} directive
4434 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4435 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4436 required, as described below.
4437
4438 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4439 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4440 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4441 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4442 with no-op instructions.
4443
4444 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4445 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4446 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4447 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4448 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4449 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4450 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4451
4452 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4453 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4454 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4455 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4456 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4457 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4458 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4459
4460 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4461 strongarm, it is the
4462 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4463 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4464 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4465 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4466
4467 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4468 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4469 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4470 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4471 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4472
4473 @node Altmacro
4474 @section @code{.altmacro}
4475 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4476
4477 @ftable @code
4478 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4479 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4480 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4481 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4482 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4483 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4484 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4485
4486 @item String delimiters
4487 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4488 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4489
4490 @table @code
4491 @item '@var{string}'
4492 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4493
4494 @item <@var{string}>
4495 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4496 @end table
4497
4498 @item single-character string escape
4499 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4500 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4501 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4502 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4503
4504 @item Expression results as strings
4505 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4506 and use the result as a string.
4507 @end ftable
4508
4509 @node Ascii
4510 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4511
4512 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4513 @cindex string literals
4514 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4515 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4516 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4517
4518 @node Asciz
4519 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4520
4521 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4522 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4523 @cindex null-terminated strings
4524 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4525 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4526
4527 @node Balign
4528 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4529
4530 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4531 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4532 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4533 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4534 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4535 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4536 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4537
4538 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4539 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4540 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4541 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4542 with no-op instructions.
4543
4544 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4545 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4546 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4547 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4548 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4549 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4550 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4551
4552 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4553 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4554 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4555 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4556 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4557 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4558 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4559 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4560 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4561 undefined.
4562
4563 @node Bundle directives
4564 @section Bundle directives
4565 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4566 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4567 @cindex bundle
4568 @cindex instruction bundle
4569 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4570 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4571 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4572 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4573 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4574 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4575 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4576
4577 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4578 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4579 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4580 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4581 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4582 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4583 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4584 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4585 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4586 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4587 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4588
4589 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4590 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4591 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4592 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4593 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4594 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4595 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4596 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4597 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4598
4599 @cindex bundle-locked
4600 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4601 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4602 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4603 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4604 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4605 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4606 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4607 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4608 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4609 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4610 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4611 bundle size.
4612
4613 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4614 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4615 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4616 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4617 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4618 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4619
4620 @node Byte
4621 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4622
4623 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4624 @cindex integers, one byte
4625 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4626 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4627
4628 @node CFI directives
4629 @section CFI directives
4630 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4631 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4632 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4633 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4634 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4635 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4636 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4637 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4638
4639 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4640 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4641
4642 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4643 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4644 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4645 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4646 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4647 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4648
4649 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4650 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4651
4652 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4653 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4654 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4655 unwind entry previously opened by
4656 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4657
4658 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4659 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4660 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4661 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4662 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4663 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4664 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4665 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4666 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4667 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4668 no personality routine.
4669
4670 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4671 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4672 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4673 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4674 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4675 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4676
4677 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4678 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4679 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4680 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4681 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4682 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4683 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4684 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4685
4686 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4687 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4688 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4689 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4690 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4691 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4692 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4693
4694 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4695 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4696 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4697 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4698 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4699 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4700
4701 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4702 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4703 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4704 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4705 by a section directive.
4706
4707 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4708 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4709 @code{.p2align} directive.
4710
4711 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4712 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4713 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4714
4715 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4716 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4717 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4718 remains the same.
4719
4720 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4721 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4722 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4723 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4724 CFA address.
4725
4726 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4727 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4728 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4729
4730 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4731 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4732 CFA.
4733
4734 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4735 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4736 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4737 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4738 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4739 code it's annotating.
4740
4741 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4742 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4743
4744 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4745 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4746 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4747 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4748
4749 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4750 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4751
4752 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4753 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4754 i.e. no restoration needed.
4755
4756 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4757 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4758 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4759 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4760 the previous saved state.
4761
4762 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4763 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4764 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4765
4766 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4767 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4768
4769 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4770 SPARC register window has been saved.
4771
4772 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4773 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4774 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4775 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4776
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4778 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4779 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4780 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4781
4782 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4783 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4784 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4785 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4786 or another register.
4787
4788 @node Comm
4789 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4790
4791 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4792 @cindex symbol, common
4793 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4794 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4795 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4796 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4797 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4798 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4799 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4800 using the largest size.
4801
4802 @ifset COFF-ELF
4803 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4804 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4805 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4806 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4807 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4808 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4809 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4810 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4811 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4812 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4813 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4814 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4815 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4816 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4817 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4818 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4819 @end ifset
4820
4821 @ifset HPPA
4822 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4823 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4824 @end ifset
4825
4826 @node Data
4827 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4828
4829 @cindex @code{data} directive
4830 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4831 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4832 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4833 to zero.
4834
4835 @ifset COFF
4836 @node Def
4837 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4838
4839 @cindex @code{def} directive
4840 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4841 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4842 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4843 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4844 @ifset BOUT
4845
4846 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4847 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4848 but ignored.
4849 @end ifset
4850 @end ifset
4851
4852 @ifset aout-bout
4853 @node Desc
4854 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4855
4856 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4857 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4858 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4859 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4860 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4861
4862 @ifset COFF
4863 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4864 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4865 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4866 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4867 @end ifset
4868 @end ifset
4869
4870 @ifset COFF
4871 @node Dim
4872 @section @code{.dim}
4873
4874 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4875 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4876 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4877 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4878 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4879 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4880 @ifset BOUT
4881
4882 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4883 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4884 ignores it.
4885 @end ifset
4886 @end ifset
4887
4888 @node Double
4889 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4890
4891 @cindex @code{double} directive
4892 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4893 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4894 assembles floating point numbers.
4895 @ifset GENERIC
4896 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4897 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4898 @end ifset
4899 @ifclear GENERIC
4900 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4901 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4902 in @sc{ieee} format.
4903 @end ifset
4904 @end ifclear
4905
4906 @node Eject
4907 @section @code{.eject}
4908
4909 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4910 @cindex new page, in listings
4911 @cindex page, in listings
4912 @cindex listing control: new page
4913 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4914
4915 @node Else
4916 @section @code{.else}
4917
4918 @cindex @code{else} directive
4919 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4920 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4921 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4922 was false.
4923
4924 @node Elseif
4925 @section @code{.elseif}
4926
4927 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4928 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4929 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4930 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4931
4932 @node End
4933 @section @code{.end}
4934
4935 @cindex @code{end} directive
4936 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4937 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4938
4939 @ifset COFF
4940 @node Endef
4941 @section @code{.endef}
4942
4943 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4944 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4945 @code{.def}.
4946 @ifset BOUT
4947
4948 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4949 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4950 directive but ignores it.
4951 @end ifset
4952 @end ifset
4953
4954 @node Endfunc
4955 @section @code{.endfunc}
4956 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4957 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4958
4959 @node Endif
4960 @section @code{.endif}
4961
4962 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4963 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4964 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4965 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4966
4967 @node Equ
4968 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4969
4970 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4971 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4972 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4973 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4974 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4975
4976 @ifset HPPA
4977 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4978 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4979 @end ifset
4980
4981 @ifset Z80
4982 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4983 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4984 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4985 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4986 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4987 @end ifset
4988
4989 @node Equiv
4990 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4991 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4992 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4993 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4994 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4995 undefined.
4996
4997 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4998 @smallexample
4999 .ifdef SYM
5000 .err
5001 .endif
5002 .equ SYM,VAL
5003 @end smallexample
5004 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5005
5006 @node Eqv
5007 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5008 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5009 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5010 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5011 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5012 value is taken.
5013
5014 @node Err
5015 @section @code{.err}
5016 @cindex @code{err} directive
5017 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5018 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5019 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5020
5021 @node Error
5022 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5023 @cindex error directive
5024
5025 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5026 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5027 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5028 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5029
5030 @smallexample
5031 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5032 @end smallexample
5033
5034 @node Exitm
5035 @section @code{.exitm}
5036 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5037
5038 @node Extern
5039 @section @code{.extern}
5040
5041 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5042 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5043 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5044 all undefined symbols as external.
5045
5046 @node Fail
5047 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5048
5049 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5050 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5051 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5052 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5053 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5054 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5055
5056 @node File
5057 @section @code{.file}
5058 @cindex @code{file} directive
5059
5060 @ifclear no-file-dir
5061 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5062 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5063 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5064
5065 @subheading Default Version
5066
5067 @cindex logical file name
5068 @cindex file name, logical
5069 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5070 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5071
5072 @smallexample
5073 .file @var{string}
5074 @end smallexample
5075
5076 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5077 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5078 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5079 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5080 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5081
5082 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5083 @end ifclear
5084
5085 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5086 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5087
5088 @smallexample
5089 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5090 @end smallexample
5091
5092 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5093 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5094 literal.
5095
5096 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5097 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5098 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5099 entries will have.
5100
5101 @node Fill
5102 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5103
5104 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5105 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5106 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5107 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5108 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5109 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5110 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5111 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5112 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5113 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5114 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5115 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5116 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5117 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5118
5119 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5120 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5121 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5122 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5123
5124 @node Float
5125 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5126
5127 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5128 @cindex @code{float} directive
5129 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5130 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5131 @ifset GENERIC
5132 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5133 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5134 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5135 @end ifset
5136 @ifclear GENERIC
5137 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5138 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5139 in @sc{ieee} format.
5140 @end ifset
5141 @end ifclear
5142
5143 @node Func
5144 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5145 @cindex @code{func} directive
5146 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5147 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5148 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5149 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5150 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5151 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5152 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5153 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5154
5155 @node Global
5156 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5157
5158 @cindex @code{global} directive
5159 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5160 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5161 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5162 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5163 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5164 from another file linked into the same program.
5165
5166 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5167 compatibility with other assemblers.
5168
5169 @ifset HPPA
5170 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5171 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5172 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5173 @end ifset
5174
5175 @ifset ELF
5176 @node Gnu_attribute
5177 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5178 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5179
5180 @node Hidden
5181 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5182
5183 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5184 @cindex visibility
5185 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5186 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5187 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5188
5189 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5190 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5191 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5192 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5193 @end ifset
5194
5195 @node hword
5196 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5197
5198 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5199 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5200 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5201 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5202 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5203 a 16 bit number for each.
5204
5205 @ifset GENERIC
5206 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5207 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5208 @end ifset
5209 @ifclear GENERIC
5210 @ifset W32
5211 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5212 @end ifset
5213 @ifset W16
5214 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5215 @end ifset
5216 @end ifclear
5217
5218 @node Ident
5219 @section @code{.ident}
5220
5221 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5222
5223 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5224 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5225 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5226 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5227 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5228 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5229 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5230
5231 @node If
5232 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5233
5234 @cindex conditional assembly
5235 @cindex @code{if} directive
5236 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5237 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5238 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5239 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5240 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5241 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5242 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5243 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5244
5245 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5246 @table @code
5247 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5248 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5249 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5250 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5251 is considered to be undefined.
5252
5253 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5254 @item .ifb @var{text}
5255 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5256
5257 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5258 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5259 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5260 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5261 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5262 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5263 string comparison is case sensitive.
5264
5265 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5266 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5267 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5268
5269 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5270 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5271 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5272
5273 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5274 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5275 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5276 equal to zero.
5277
5278 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5279 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5280 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5281
5282 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5283 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5284 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5285 to zero.
5286
5287 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5288 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5289 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5290
5291 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5292 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5293 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5294 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5295
5296 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5297 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5298 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5299 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5300
5301 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5302 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5303 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5304 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5305 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5306 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5307 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5308
5309 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5310 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5311 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5312 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5313
5314 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5315 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5316 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5317 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5318 @end table
5319
5320 @node Incbin
5321 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5322
5323 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5324 @cindex binary files, including
5325 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5326 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5327 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5328 around @var{file}.
5329
5330 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5331 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5332 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5333 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5334 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5335
5336 @node Include
5337 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5338
5339 @cindex @code{include} directive
5340 @cindex supporting files, including
5341 @cindex files, including
5342 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5343 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5344 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5345 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5346 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5347 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5348 around @var{file}.
5349
5350 @node Int
5351 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5352
5353 @cindex @code{int} directive
5354 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5355 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5356 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5357 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5358 of target the assembly is for.
5359
5360 @ifclear GENERIC
5361 @ifset H8
5362 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5363 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5364 32-bit integers.
5365 @end ifset
5366 @end ifclear
5367
5368 @ifset ELF
5369 @node Internal
5370 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5371
5372 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5373 @cindex visibility
5374 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5375 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5376 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5377
5378 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5379 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5380 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5381 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5382 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5383 @end ifset
5384
5385 @node Irp
5386 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5387
5388 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5389 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5390 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5391 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5392 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5393 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5394 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5395 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5396
5397 For example, assembling
5398
5399 @example
5400 .irp param,1,2,3
5401 move d\param,sp@@-
5402 .endr
5403 @end example
5404
5405 is equivalent to assembling
5406
5407 @example
5408 move d1,sp@@-
5409 move d2,sp@@-
5410 move d3,sp@@-
5411 @end example
5412
5413 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5414
5415 @node Irpc
5416 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5417
5418 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5419 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5420 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5421 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5422 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5423 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5424 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5425 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5426
5427 For example, assembling
5428
5429 @example
5430 .irpc param,123
5431 move d\param,sp@@-
5432 .endr
5433 @end example
5434
5435 is equivalent to assembling
5436
5437 @example
5438 move d1,sp@@-
5439 move d2,sp@@-
5440 move d3,sp@@-
5441 @end example
5442
5443 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5444 at @xref{Macro}.
5445
5446 @node Lcomm
5447 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5448
5449 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5450 @cindex local common symbols
5451 @cindex symbols, local common
5452 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5453 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5454 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5455 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5456 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5457 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5458
5459 @ifset GENERIC
5460 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5461 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5462 @end ifset
5463
5464 @ifset HPPA
5465 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5466 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5467 @end ifset
5468
5469 @node Lflags
5470 @section @code{.lflags}
5471
5472 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5473 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5474 assemblers, but ignores it.
5475
5476 @ifclear no-line-dir
5477 @node Line
5478 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5479
5480 @cindex @code{line} directive
5481 @cindex logical line number
5482 @ifset aout-bout
5483 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5484 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5485 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5486 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5487 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5488 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5489 @end ifset
5490
5491 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5492 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5493 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5494 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5495 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5496
5497 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5498 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5499 debugging.
5500 @end ifclear
5501
5502 @node Linkonce
5503 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5504 @cindex COMDAT
5505 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5506 @cindex common sections
5507 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5508 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5509 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5510 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5511 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5512 unique.
5513
5514 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5515 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5516 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5517
5518 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5519 following strings. For example:
5520 @smallexample
5521 .linkonce same_size
5522 @end smallexample
5523 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5524
5525 @table @code
5526 @item discard
5527 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5528
5529 @item one_only
5530 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5531
5532 @item same_size
5533 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5534
5535 @item same_contents
5536 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5537 @end table
5538
5539 @node List
5540 @section @code{.list}
5541
5542 @cindex @code{list} directive
5543 @cindex listing control, turning on
5544 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5545 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5546 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5547 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5548 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5549
5550 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5551 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5552 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5553
5554 @node Ln
5555 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5556
5557 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5558 @ifclear no-line-dir
5559 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5560 @end ifclear
5561 @ifset no-line-dir
5562 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5563 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5564 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5565 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5566 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5567 @ifset BOUT
5568
5569 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5570 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5571 output format.
5572 @end ifset
5573 @end ifset
5574
5575 @node Loc
5576 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5577 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5578 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5579 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5580 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5581 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5582 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5583 the row is added.
5584
5585 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5586
5587 @table @code
5588 @item basic_block
5589 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5590 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5591
5592 @item prologue_end
5593 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5594 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5595
5596 @item epilogue_begin
5597 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5598 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5599
5600 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5601 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5602 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5603 either 0 or 1.
5604
5605 @item isa @var{value}
5606 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5607 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5608
5609 @item discriminator @var{value}
5610 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5611 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5612
5613 @end table
5614
5615 @node Loc_mark_labels
5616 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5617 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5618 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5619 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5620 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5621 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5622 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5623 this function respectively.
5624
5625 @ifset ELF
5626 @node Local
5627 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5628
5629 @cindex @code{local} directive
5630 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5631 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5632 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5633 they will be created.
5634
5635 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5636 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5637 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5638 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5639 @end ifset
5640
5641 @node Long
5642 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5643
5644 @cindex @code{long} directive
5645 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5646
5647 @ignore
5648 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5649 @c what it really ought to do
5650 @node Lsym
5651 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5652
5653 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5654 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5655 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5656 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5657 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5658 the same as the expression value:
5659 @smallexample
5660 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5661 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5662 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5663 @end smallexample
5664 @noindent
5665 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5666 @end ignore
5667
5668 @node Macro
5669 @section @code{.macro}
5670
5671 @cindex macros
5672 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5673 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5674 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5675
5676 @example
5677 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5678 .long \from
5679 .if \to-\from
5680 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5681 .endif
5682 .endm
5683 @end example
5684
5685 @noindent
5686 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5687
5688 @example
5689 .long 0
5690 .long 1
5691 .long 2
5692 .long 3
5693 .long 4
5694 .long 5
5695 @end example
5696
5697 @ftable @code
5698 @item .macro @var{macname}
5699 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5700 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5701 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5702 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5703 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5704 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5705 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5706 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5707 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5708 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5709 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5710 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5711
5712 @table @code
5713 @item .macro comm
5714 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5715 arguments.
5716
5717 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5718 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5719 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5720 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5721 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5722
5723 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5724 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5725 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5726 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5727 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5728 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5729 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5730 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5731
5732 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5733 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5734 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5735 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5736 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5737
5738 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5739 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5740 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5741
5742 @end table
5743
5744 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5745 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5746 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5747 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5748 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5749 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5750 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5751 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5752 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5753 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5754 this macro definition:
5755
5756 @example
5757 .macro label l
5758 \l:
5759 .endm
5760 @end example
5761
5762 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5763 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5764 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5765 identifier.
5766
5767 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5768 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5769 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5770 length specifier like this:
5771
5772 @example
5773 .macro opcode base length
5774 \base.\length
5775 .endm
5776 @end example
5777
5778 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5779 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5780 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5781
5782 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5783
5784 @table @code
5785 @item Insert white space
5786 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5787 solution. eg:
5788
5789 @example
5790 .macro label l
5791 \l :
5792 .endm
5793 @end example
5794
5795 @item Use @samp{\()}
5796 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5797 the following text. eg:
5798
5799 @example
5800 .macro opcode base length
5801 \base\().\length
5802 .endm
5803 @end example
5804
5805 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5806 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5807 used as a separator. eg:
5808
5809 @example
5810 .altmacro
5811 .macro label l
5812 l&:
5813 .endm
5814 @end example
5815 @end table
5816
5817 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5818 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5819 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5820
5821 @item .endm
5822 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5823 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5824
5825 @item .exitm
5826 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5827 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5828
5829 @cindex number of macros executed
5830 @cindex macros, count executed
5831 @item \@@
5832 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5833 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5834 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5835
5836 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5837 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5838 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5839 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5840 @end ftable
5841
5842 @node MRI
5843 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5844
5845 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5846 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5847 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5848 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5849 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5850 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5851
5852 @node Noaltmacro
5853 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5854 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5855
5856 @node Nolist
5857 @section @code{.nolist}
5858
5859 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5860 @cindex listing control, turning off
5861 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5862 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5863 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5864 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5865 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5866
5867 @node Octa
5868 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5869
5870 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5871 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5872 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5873 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5874 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5875 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5876
5877 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5878 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5879
5880 @node Offset
5881 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5882
5883 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5884 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5885 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5886 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5887 directive.
5888
5889 @node Org
5890 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5891
5892 @cindex @code{org} directive
5893 @cindex location counter, advancing
5894 @cindex advancing location counter
5895 @cindex current address, advancing
5896 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5897 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5898 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5899 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5900 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5901 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5902 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5903 is the same as the current subsection.
5904
5905 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5906 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5907 backwards.
5908
5909 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5910 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5911 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5912 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5913 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5914 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5915
5916 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5917 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5918 people's assemblers.
5919
5920 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5921 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5922 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5923 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5924
5925 @node P2align
5926 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5927
5928 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5929 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5930 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5931 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5932 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5933 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5934 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5935 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5936
5937 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5938 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5939 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5940 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5941 with no-op instructions.
5942
5943 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5944 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5945 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5946 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5947 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5948 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5949 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5950
5951 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5952 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5953 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5954 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5955 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5956 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5957 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5958 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5959 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5960 undefined.
5961
5962 @ifset ELF
5963 @node PopSection
5964 @section @code{.popsection}
5965
5966 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5967 @cindex Section Stack
5968 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5969 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5970 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5971 (@pxref{Previous}).
5972
5973 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5974 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5975 stack.
5976 @end ifset
5977
5978 @ifset ELF
5979 @node Previous
5980 @section @code{.previous}
5981
5982 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5983 @cindex Section Stack
5984 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5985 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5986 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5987 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5988
5989 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5990 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5991 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5992 subsections). For example:
5993
5994 @smallexample
5995 .section A
5996 .subsection 1
5997 .word 0x1234
5998 .subsection 2
5999 .word 0x5678
6000 .previous
6001 .word 0x9abc
6002 @end smallexample
6003
6004 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6005 section A. Whilst:
6006
6007 @smallexample
6008 .section A
6009 .subsection 1
6010 # Now in section A subsection 1
6011 .word 0x1234
6012 .section B
6013 .subsection 0
6014 # Now in section B subsection 0
6015 .word 0x5678
6016 .subsection 1
6017 # Now in section B subsection 1
6018 .word 0x9abc
6019 .previous
6020 # Now in section B subsection 0
6021 .word 0xdef0
6022 @end smallexample
6023
6024 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6025 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6026
6027 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6028 the top section on the section stack.
6029 @end ifset
6030
6031 @node Print
6032 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6033
6034 @cindex @code{print} directive
6035 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6036 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6037
6038 @ifset ELF
6039 @node Protected
6040 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6041
6042 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6043 @cindex visibility
6044 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6045 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6046
6047 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6048 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6049 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6050 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6051 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6052 this.
6053 @end ifset
6054
6055 @node Psize
6056 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6057
6058 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6059 @cindex listing control: paper size
6060 @cindex paper size, for listings
6061 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6062 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6063
6064 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6065 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6066 default width is 200 columns.
6067
6068 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6069 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6070 @code{.eject}).
6071
6072 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6073 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6074
6075 @node Purgem
6076 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6077
6078 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6079 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6080 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6081
6082 @ifset ELF
6083 @node PushSection
6084 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6085
6086 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6087 @cindex Section Stack
6088 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6089 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6090 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6091 (@pxref{Previous}).
6092
6093 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6094 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6095 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6096 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6097 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6098 @end ifset
6099
6100 @node Quad
6101 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6102
6103 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6104 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6105 each bignum, it emits
6106 @ifclear bignum-16
6107 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6108 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6109 @cindex eight-byte integer
6110 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6111
6112 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6113 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6114 @end ifclear
6115 @ifset bignum-16
6116 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6117 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6118 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6119 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6120 @end ifset
6121
6122 @node Reloc
6123 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6124
6125 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6126 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6127 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6128 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6129 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6130 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6131 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6132 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6133 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6134 section.
6135
6136 @node Rept
6137 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6138
6139 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6140 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6141 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6142
6143 For example, assembling
6144
6145 @example
6146 .rept 3
6147 .long 0
6148 .endr
6149 @end example
6150
6151 is equivalent to assembling
6152
6153 @example
6154 .long 0
6155 .long 0
6156 .long 0
6157 @end example
6158
6159 @node Sbttl
6160 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6161
6162 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6163 @cindex subtitles for listings
6164 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6165 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6166 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6167
6168 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6169 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6170
6171 @ifset COFF
6172 @node Scl
6173 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6174
6175 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6176 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6177 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6178 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6179 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6180 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6181 symbolic debugging information.
6182 @ifset BOUT
6183
6184 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6185 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6186 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6187 @end ifset
6188 @end ifset
6189
6190 @ifset COFF-ELF
6191 @node Section
6192 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6193
6194 @cindex named section
6195 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6196 named @var{name}.
6197
6198 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6199 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6200 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6201
6202 @ifset COFF
6203 @ifset ELF
6204 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6205 @subheading COFF Version
6206 @end ifset
6207
6208 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6209 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6210 ways:
6211
6212 @smallexample
6213 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6214 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6215 @end smallexample
6216
6217 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6218 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6219 @table @code
6220 @item b
6221 bss section (uninitialized data)
6222 @item n
6223 section is not loaded
6224 @item w
6225 writable section
6226 @item d
6227 data section
6228 @item e
6229 exclude section from linking
6230 @item r
6231 read-only section
6232 @item x
6233 executable section
6234 @item s
6235 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6236 @item a
6237 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6238 @item y
6239 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6240 @item 0-9
6241 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6242 @end table
6243
6244 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6245 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6246 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6247 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6248 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6249
6250 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6251 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6252 @end ifset
6253
6254 @ifset ELF
6255 @ifset COFF
6256 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6257 @subheading ELF Version
6258 @end ifset
6259
6260 @cindex Section Stack
6261 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6262 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6263 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6264 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6265
6266 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6267 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6268
6269 @smallexample
6270 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6271 @end smallexample
6272
6273 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6274 @kindex --sectname-subst
6275 @cindex section name substitution
6276 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6277 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6278 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6279
6280 @smallexample
6281 .macro exception_code
6282 .section %S.exception
6283 [exception code here]
6284 .previous
6285 .endm
6286
6287 .text
6288 [code]
6289 exception_code
6290 [...]
6291
6292 .section .init
6293 [init code]
6294 exception_code
6295 [...]
6296 @end smallexample
6297
6298 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6299 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6300 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6301 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6302 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6303 macros just for that purpose.
6304
6305 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6306 combination of the following characters:
6307 @table @code
6308 @item a
6309 section is allocatable
6310 @item e
6311 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6312 @item w
6313 section is writable
6314 @item x
6315 section is executable
6316 @item M
6317 section is mergeable
6318 @item S
6319 section contains zero terminated strings
6320 @item G
6321 section is a member of a section group
6322 @item T
6323 section is used for thread-local-storage
6324 @item ?
6325 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6326 @end table
6327
6328 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6329 @table @code
6330 @item @@progbits
6331 section contains data
6332 @item @@nobits
6333 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6334 @item @@note
6335 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6336 @item @@init_array
6337 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6338 @item @@fini_array
6339 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6340 @item @@preinit_array
6341 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6342 @end table
6343
6344 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6345
6346 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6347 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6348 @code{%} character.
6349
6350 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6351 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6352
6353 @smallexample
6354 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6355 @end smallexample
6356
6357 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6358 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6359 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6360 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6361 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6362 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6363 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6364 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6365 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6366
6367 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6368 be present along with an additional field like this:
6369
6370 @smallexample
6371 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6372 @end smallexample
6373
6374 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6375 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6376 @table @code
6377 @item comdat
6378 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6379 @item .gnu.linkonce
6380 an alias for comdat
6381 @end table
6382
6383 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6384 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6385
6386 @smallexample
6387 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6391 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6392 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6393 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6394 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6395 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6396
6397 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6398 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6399 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6400 executable. The section will contain data.
6401
6402 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6403 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6404
6405 @smallexample
6406 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6407 @end smallexample
6408
6409 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6410 separated flags:
6411 @table @code
6412 @item #alloc
6413 section is allocatable
6414 @item #write
6415 section is writable
6416 @item #execinstr
6417 section is executable
6418 @item #exclude
6419 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6420 @item #tls
6421 section is used for thread local storage
6422 @end table
6423
6424 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6425 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6426 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6427 work.
6428 @end ifset
6429 @end ifset
6430
6431 @node Set
6432 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6433
6434 @cindex @code{set} directive
6435 @cindex symbol value, setting
6436 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6437 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6438 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6439 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6440
6441 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6442 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6443 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6444 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6445 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6446 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6447 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6448 different symbols.
6449
6450 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6451 file is the last value stored into it.
6452
6453 @ifset Z80
6454 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6455 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6456 @end ifset
6457
6458 @node Short
6459 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6460
6461 @cindex @code{short} directive
6462 @ifset GENERIC
6463 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6464 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6465
6466 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6467 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6468 @end ifset
6469 @ifclear GENERIC
6470 @ifset W16
6471 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6472 @end ifset
6473 @ifset W32
6474 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6475 a 16 bit number for each.
6476 @end ifset
6477 @end ifclear
6478
6479 @node Single
6480 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6481
6482 @cindex @code{single} directive
6483 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6484 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6485 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6486 @ifset GENERIC
6487 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6488 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6489 @end ifset
6490 @ifclear GENERIC
6491 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6492 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6493 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6494 @end ifset
6495 @end ifclear
6496
6497 @ifset COFF-ELF
6498 @node Size
6499 @section @code{.size}
6500
6501 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6502
6503 @ifset COFF
6504 @ifset ELF
6505 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6506 @subheading COFF Version
6507 @end ifset
6508
6509 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6510 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6511 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6512
6513 @smallexample
6514 .size @var{expression}
6515 @end smallexample
6516
6517 @ifset BOUT
6518 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6519 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6520 ignores it.
6521 @end ifset
6522 @end ifset
6523
6524 @ifset ELF
6525 @ifset COFF
6526 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6527 @subheading ELF Version
6528 @end ifset
6529
6530 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6531 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6532
6533 @smallexample
6534 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6535 @end smallexample
6536
6537 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6538 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6539 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6540 symbols.
6541 @end ifset
6542 @end ifset
6543
6544 @ifclear no-space-dir
6545 @node Skip
6546 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6547
6548 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6549 @cindex filling memory
6550 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6551 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6552 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6553 @samp{.space}.
6554 @end ifclear
6555
6556 @node Sleb128
6557 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6558
6559 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6560 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6561 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6562 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6563
6564 @ifclear no-space-dir
6565 @node Space
6566 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6567
6568 @cindex @code{space} directive
6569 @cindex filling memory
6570 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6571 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6572 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6573 as @samp{.skip}.
6574
6575 @ifset HPPA
6576 @quotation
6577 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6578 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6579 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6580 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6581 for a summary.
6582 @end quotation
6583 @end ifset
6584 @end ifclear
6585
6586 @ifset have-stabs
6587 @node Stab
6588 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6589
6590 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6591 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6592 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6593 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6594 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6595 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6596 Up to five fields are required:
6597
6598 @table @var
6599 @item string
6600 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6601 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6602 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6603 using this field.
6604
6605 @item type
6606 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6607 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6608 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6609
6610 @item other
6611 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6612 low 8 bits of this expression.
6613
6614 @item desc
6615 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6616 bits of this expression.
6617
6618 @item value
6619 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6620 @end table
6621
6622 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6623 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6624 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6625 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6626
6627 @table @code
6628 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6629 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6630
6631 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6632 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6633 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6634 strings.
6635
6636 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6637 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6638 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6639 assembled.
6640
6641 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6642 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6643 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6644
6645 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6646 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6647 All five fields are specified.
6648 @end table
6649 @end ifset
6650 @c end have-stabs
6651
6652 @node String
6653 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6654 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6655
6656 @cindex string, copying to object file
6657 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6658 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6659 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6660 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6661 @cindex @code{string} directive
6662 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6663 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6664 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6665 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6666
6667 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6668 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6669 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6670 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6671
6672 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6673 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6674 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6675 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6676
6677 Example:
6678 @smallexample
6679 .string32 "BYE"
6680 expands to:
6681 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6682 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6683 @end smallexample
6684
6685
6686 @node Struct
6687 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6688
6689 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6690 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6691 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6692 @smallexample
6693 .struct 0
6694 field1:
6695 .struct field1 + 4
6696 field2:
6697 .struct field2 + 4
6698 field3:
6699 @end smallexample
6700 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6701 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6702 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6703 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6704 before further assembly.
6705
6706 @ifset ELF
6707 @node SubSection
6708 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6709
6710 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6711 @cindex Section Stack
6712 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6713 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6714 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6715 (@pxref{Previous}).
6716
6717 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6718 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6719 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6720 @end ifset
6721
6722 @ifset ELF
6723 @node Symver
6724 @section @code{.symver}
6725 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6726 @cindex symbol versioning
6727 @cindex versions of symbols
6728 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6729 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6730 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6731 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6732 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6733 shared library.
6734
6735 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6736 @smallexample
6737 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6738 @end smallexample
6739 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6740 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6741 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6742 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6743 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6744 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6745 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6746 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6747 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6748 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6749 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6750 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6751 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6752 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6753
6754 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6755 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6756 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6757 symbol table.
6758
6759 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6760 @smallexample
6761 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6762 @end smallexample
6763 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6764 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6765 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6766 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6767
6768 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6769 @smallexample
6770 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6771 @end smallexample
6772 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6773 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6774 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6775 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6776 @end ifset
6777
6778 @ifset COFF
6779 @node Tag
6780 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6781
6782 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6783 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6784 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6785 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6786 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6787 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6788 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6789 @ifset BOUT
6790
6791 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6792 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6793 ignores it.
6794 @end ifset
6795 @end ifset
6796
6797 @node Text
6798 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6799
6800 @cindex @code{text} directive
6801 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6802 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6803 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6804 is used.
6805
6806 @node Title
6807 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6808
6809 @cindex @code{title} directive
6810 @cindex listing control: title line
6811 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6812 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6813
6814 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6815 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6816
6817 @ifset COFF-ELF
6818 @node Type
6819 @section @code{.type}
6820
6821 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6822
6823 @ifset COFF
6824 @ifset ELF
6825 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6826 @subheading COFF Version
6827 @end ifset
6828
6829 @cindex COFF symbol type
6830 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6831 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6832 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6833 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6834
6835 @smallexample
6836 .type @var{int}
6837 @end smallexample
6838
6839 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6840 entry.
6841
6842 @ifset BOUT
6843 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6844 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6845 directive but ignores it.
6846 @end ifset
6847 @end ifset
6848
6849 @ifset ELF
6850 @ifset COFF
6851 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6852 @subheading ELF Version
6853 @end ifset
6854
6855 @cindex ELF symbol type
6856 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6857 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6858 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6859
6860 @smallexample
6861 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6862 @end smallexample
6863
6864 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6865 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6866 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6867 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6868
6869 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6870 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6871 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6872 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6873 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6874 assemblers.
6875
6876 The syntaxes supported are:
6877
6878 @smallexample
6879 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6880 .type <name>,#<type>
6881 .type <name>,@@<type>
6882 .type <name>,%<type>
6883 .type <name>,"<type>"
6884 @end smallexample
6885
6886 The types supported are:
6887
6888 @table @gcctabopt
6889 @item STT_FUNC
6890 @itemx function
6891 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6892
6893 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6894 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6895 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6896 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6897
6898 @item STT_OBJECT
6899 @itemx object
6900 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6901
6902 @item STT_TLS
6903 @itemx tls_object
6904 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6905
6906 @item STT_COMMON
6907 @itemx common
6908 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6909
6910 @item STT_NOTYPE
6911 @itemx notype
6912 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6913
6914 @item gnu_unique_object
6915 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6916 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6917 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6918 systems).
6919
6920 @end table
6921
6922 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6923
6924 @end ifset
6925 @end ifset
6926
6927 @node Uleb128
6928 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6929
6930 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6931 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6932 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6933 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6934
6935 @ifset COFF
6936 @node Val
6937 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6938
6939 @cindex @code{val} directive
6940 @cindex COFF value attribute
6941 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6942 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6943 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6944 entry.
6945 @ifset BOUT
6946
6947 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6948 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6949 @end ifset
6950 @end ifset
6951
6952 @ifset ELF
6953 @node Version
6954 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6955
6956 @cindex @code{version} directive
6957 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6958 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6959 @end ifset
6960
6961 @ifset ELF
6962 @node VTableEntry
6963 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6964
6965 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6966 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6967 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6968
6969 @node VTableInherit
6970 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6971
6972 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6973 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6974 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6975 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6976 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6977 @end ifset
6978
6979 @node Warning
6980 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6981 @cindex warning directive
6982 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6983 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6984
6985 @node Weak
6986 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6987
6988 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6989 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6990 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6991
6992 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6993 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6994 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6995
6996 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6997 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6998 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6999
7000 @node Weakref
7001 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7002
7003 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7004 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7005 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7006 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7007 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7008 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7009
7010 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7011 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7012 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7013 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7014 had the references to the alias removed.
7015
7016 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7017 within the assembler.
7018
7019 @node Word
7020 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7021
7022 @cindex @code{word} directive
7023 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7024 separated by commas.
7025 @ifclear GENERIC
7026 @ifset W32
7027 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset W16
7030 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7031 @end ifset
7032 @end ifclear
7033 @ifset GENERIC
7034
7035 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7036 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7037 @end ifset
7038
7039 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7040 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7041 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7042 @cindex difference tables altered
7043 @cindex altered difference tables
7044 @quotation
7045 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7046 @end quotation
7047
7048 @ifset GENERIC
7049 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7050 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7051 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7052 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7053
7054 @end ifset
7055 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7056 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7057 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7058 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7059 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7060 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7061 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7062 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7063 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7064 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7065 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7066 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7067 @code{sym2}.
7068
7069 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7070 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7071 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7072 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7073 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7074 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7075 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7076
7077 @ifset INTERNALS
7078 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7079 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7080 assembly language programmers.
7081 @end ifset
7082 @end ifset
7083 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7084
7085 @ifclear no-space-dir
7086 @node Zero
7087 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7088
7089 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7090 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7091 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7092 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7093 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7094 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7095 @end ifclear
7096
7097 @node Deprecated
7098 @section Deprecated Directives
7099
7100 @cindex deprecated directives
7101 @cindex obsolescent directives
7102 One day these directives won't work.
7103 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7104 @table @t
7105 @item .abort
7106 @item .line
7107 @end table
7108
7109 @ifset ELF
7110 @node Object Attributes
7111 @chapter Object Attributes
7112 @cindex object attributes
7113
7114 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7115 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7116 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7117 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7118 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7119 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7120 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7121 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7122 newer generation at run-time.
7123
7124 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7125 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7126 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7127 correctly.
7128
7129 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7130 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7131 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7132 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7133 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7134 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7135
7136 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7137 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7138
7139 @menu
7140 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7141 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7142 @end menu
7143
7144 @node GNU Object Attributes
7145 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7146
7147 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7148 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7149
7150 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7151 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7152 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7153 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7154 architecture-dependent ones.
7155
7156 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7157
7158 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7159
7160 @table @r
7161 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7162 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7163 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7164 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7165 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7166 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7167 @end table
7168
7169 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7170
7171 @table @r
7172 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7173 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7174
7175 @itemize @bullet
7176 @item
7177 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7178 @item
7179 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7180 double-precision FPU.
7181 @item
7182 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7183 @item
7184 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7185 @item
7186 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7187 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7188 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7189 @item
7190 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7191 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7192 general-purpose registers.
7193 @item
7194 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7195 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7196 @item
7197 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7198 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7199 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7200 @end itemize
7201 @end table
7202
7203 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7204
7205 @table @r
7206 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7207 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7208
7209 @itemize @bullet
7210 @item
7211 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7212 @item
7213 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7214 @item
7215 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7216 @item
7217 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7218 @end itemize
7219
7220 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7221 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7222
7223 @itemize @bullet
7224 @item
7225 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7226 @item
7227 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7228 @item
7229 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7230 @item
7231 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7232 @end itemize
7233 @end table
7234
7235 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7236
7237 @table @r
7238 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7239 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7240
7241 @itemize @bullet
7242 @item
7243 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7244 @item
7245 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7246 @item
7247 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7248 @end itemize
7249 @end table
7250
7251 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7252 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7253
7254 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7255 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7256 mailing list.
7257
7258 @itemize @bullet
7259 @item
7260 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7261 @item
7262 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7263 @item
7264 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7265 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7266 @item
7267 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7268 @item
7269 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7270 @item
7271 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7272 @end itemize
7273
7274 @end ifset
7275
7276 @ifset GENERIC
7277 @node Machine Dependencies
7278 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7279
7280 @cindex machine dependencies
7281 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7282 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7283 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7284 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7285 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7286 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7287 optimization.
7288
7289 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7290 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7291 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7292
7293 @menu
7294 @ifset AARCH64
7295 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7296 @end ifset
7297 @ifset ALPHA
7298 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7299 @end ifset
7300 @ifset ARC
7301 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7302 @end ifset
7303 @ifset ARM
7304 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7305 @end ifset
7306 @ifset AVR
7307 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7308 @end ifset
7309 @ifset Blackfin
7310 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset CR16
7313 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7314 @end ifset
7315 @ifset CRIS
7316 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7317 @end ifset
7318 @ifset D10V
7319 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7320 @end ifset
7321 @ifset D30V
7322 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7323 @end ifset
7324 @ifset EPIPHANY
7325 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7326 @end ifset
7327 @ifset H8/300
7328 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7329 @end ifset
7330 @ifset HPPA
7331 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7332 @end ifset
7333 @ifset I370
7334 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7335 @end ifset
7336 @ifset I80386
7337 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7338 @end ifset
7339 @ifset I860
7340 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7341 @end ifset
7342 @ifset I960
7343 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7344 @end ifset
7345 @ifset IA64
7346 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7347 @end ifset
7348 @ifset IP2K
7349 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7350 @end ifset
7351 @ifset LM32
7352 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7353 @end ifset
7354 @ifset M32C
7355 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7356 @end ifset
7357 @ifset M32R
7358 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7359 @end ifset
7360 @ifset M680X0
7361 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7362 @end ifset
7363 @ifset M68HC11
7364 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7365 @end ifset
7366 @ifset METAG
7367 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7368 @end ifset
7369 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7370 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7371 @end ifset
7372 @ifset MIPS
7373 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset MMIX
7376 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset MSP430
7379 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset NDS32
7382 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset NIOSII
7385 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset NS32K
7388 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7389 @end ifset
7390 @ifset PDP11
7391 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7392 @end ifset
7393 @ifset PJ
7394 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7395 @end ifset
7396 @ifset PPC
7397 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7398 @end ifset
7399 @ifset RL78
7400 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7401 @end ifset
7402 @ifset RX
7403 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7404 @end ifset
7405 @ifset S390
7406 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7407 @end ifset
7408 @ifset SCORE
7409 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7410 @end ifset
7411 @ifset SH
7412 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7413 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7414 @end ifset
7415 @ifset SPARC
7416 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset TIC54X
7419 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7420 @end ifset
7421 @ifset TIC6X
7422 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7423 @end ifset
7424 @ifset TILEGX
7425 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7426 @end ifset
7427 @ifset TILEPRO
7428 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7429 @end ifset
7430 @ifset V850
7431 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7432 @end ifset
7433 @ifset VAX
7434 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7435 @end ifset
7436 @ifset VISIUM
7437 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7438 @end ifset
7439 @ifset XGATE
7440 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7441 @end ifset
7442 @ifset XSTORMY16
7443 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7444 @end ifset
7445 @ifset XTENSA
7446 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7447 @end ifset
7448 @ifset Z80
7449 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7450 @end ifset
7451 @ifset Z8000
7452 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7453 @end ifset
7454 @end menu
7455
7456 @lowersections
7457 @end ifset
7458
7459 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7460 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7461 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7462 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7463 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7464 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7465 @c in both conditional blocks.
7466
7467 @ifset AARCH64
7468 @include c-aarch64.texi
7469 @end ifset
7470
7471 @ifset ALPHA
7472 @include c-alpha.texi
7473 @end ifset
7474
7475 @ifset ARC
7476 @include c-arc.texi
7477 @end ifset
7478
7479 @ifset ARM
7480 @include c-arm.texi
7481 @end ifset
7482
7483 @ifset AVR
7484 @include c-avr.texi
7485 @end ifset
7486
7487 @ifset Blackfin
7488 @include c-bfin.texi
7489 @end ifset
7490
7491 @ifset CR16
7492 @include c-cr16.texi
7493 @end ifset
7494
7495 @ifset CRIS
7496 @include c-cris.texi
7497 @end ifset
7498
7499 @ifset Renesas-all
7500 @ifclear GENERIC
7501 @node Machine Dependencies
7502 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7503
7504 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7505 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7506 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7507 family.
7508
7509 @menu
7510 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7511 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7512 @end menu
7513 @lowersections
7514 @end ifclear
7515 @end ifset
7516
7517 @ifset D10V
7518 @include c-d10v.texi
7519 @end ifset
7520
7521 @ifset D30V
7522 @include c-d30v.texi
7523 @end ifset
7524
7525 @ifset EPIPHANY
7526 @include c-epiphany.texi
7527 @end ifset
7528
7529 @ifset H8/300
7530 @include c-h8300.texi
7531 @end ifset
7532
7533 @ifset HPPA
7534 @include c-hppa.texi
7535 @end ifset
7536
7537 @ifset I370
7538 @include c-i370.texi
7539 @end ifset
7540
7541 @ifset I80386
7542 @include c-i386.texi
7543 @end ifset
7544
7545 @ifset I860
7546 @include c-i860.texi
7547 @end ifset
7548
7549 @ifset I960
7550 @include c-i960.texi
7551 @end ifset
7552
7553 @ifset IA64
7554 @include c-ia64.texi
7555 @end ifset
7556
7557 @ifset IP2K
7558 @include c-ip2k.texi
7559 @end ifset
7560
7561 @ifset LM32
7562 @include c-lm32.texi
7563 @end ifset
7564
7565 @ifset M32C
7566 @include c-m32c.texi
7567 @end ifset
7568
7569 @ifset M32R
7570 @include c-m32r.texi
7571 @end ifset
7572
7573 @ifset M680X0
7574 @include c-m68k.texi
7575 @end ifset
7576
7577 @ifset M68HC11
7578 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7579 @end ifset
7580
7581 @ifset METAG
7582 @include c-metag.texi
7583 @end ifset
7584
7585 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7586 @include c-microblaze.texi
7587 @end ifset
7588
7589 @ifset MIPS
7590 @include c-mips.texi
7591 @end ifset
7592
7593 @ifset MMIX
7594 @include c-mmix.texi
7595 @end ifset
7596
7597 @ifset MSP430
7598 @include c-msp430.texi
7599 @end ifset
7600
7601 @ifset NDS32
7602 @include c-nds32.texi
7603 @end ifset
7604
7605 @ifset NIOSII
7606 @include c-nios2.texi
7607 @end ifset
7608
7609 @ifset NS32K
7610 @include c-ns32k.texi
7611 @end ifset
7612
7613 @ifset PDP11
7614 @include c-pdp11.texi
7615 @end ifset
7616
7617 @ifset PJ
7618 @include c-pj.texi
7619 @end ifset
7620
7621 @ifset PPC
7622 @include c-ppc.texi
7623 @end ifset
7624
7625 @ifset RL78
7626 @include c-rl78.texi
7627 @end ifset
7628
7629 @ifset RX
7630 @include c-rx.texi
7631 @end ifset
7632
7633 @ifset S390
7634 @include c-s390.texi
7635 @end ifset
7636
7637 @ifset SCORE
7638 @include c-score.texi
7639 @end ifset
7640
7641 @ifset SH
7642 @include c-sh.texi
7643 @include c-sh64.texi
7644 @end ifset
7645
7646 @ifset SPARC
7647 @include c-sparc.texi
7648 @end ifset
7649
7650 @ifset TIC54X
7651 @include c-tic54x.texi
7652 @end ifset
7653
7654 @ifset TIC6X
7655 @include c-tic6x.texi
7656 @end ifset
7657
7658 @ifset TILEGX
7659 @include c-tilegx.texi
7660 @end ifset
7661
7662 @ifset TILEPRO
7663 @include c-tilepro.texi
7664 @end ifset
7665
7666 @ifset V850
7667 @include c-v850.texi
7668 @end ifset
7669
7670 @ifset VAX
7671 @include c-vax.texi
7672 @end ifset
7673
7674 @ifset VISIUM
7675 @include c-visium.texi
7676 @end ifset
7677
7678 @ifset XGATE
7679 @include c-xgate.texi
7680 @end ifset
7681
7682 @ifset XSTORMY16
7683 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7684 @end ifset
7685
7686 @ifset XTENSA
7687 @include c-xtensa.texi
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset Z80
7691 @include c-z80.texi
7692 @end ifset
7693
7694 @ifset Z8000
7695 @include c-z8k.texi
7696 @end ifset
7697
7698 @ifset GENERIC
7699 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7700 @raisesections
7701 @end ifset
7702
7703 @node Reporting Bugs
7704 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7705 @cindex bugs in assembler
7706 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7707
7708 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7709
7710 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7711 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7712 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7713 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7714
7715 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7716 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7717
7718 @menu
7719 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7720 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7721 @end menu
7722
7723 @node Bug Criteria
7724 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7725 @cindex bug criteria
7726
7727 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7728
7729 @itemize @bullet
7730 @cindex fatal signal
7731 @cindex assembler crash
7732 @cindex crash of assembler
7733 @item
7734 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7735 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7736
7737 @cindex error on valid input
7738 @item
7739 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7740
7741 @cindex invalid input
7742 @item
7743 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7744 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7745 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7746
7747 @item
7748 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7749 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7750 @end itemize
7751
7752 @node Bug Reporting
7753 @section How to Report Bugs
7754 @cindex bug reports
7755 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7756
7757 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7758 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7759 contact that organization first.
7760
7761 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7762 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7763 distribution.
7764
7765 @ifset BUGURL
7766 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7767 to @value{BUGURL}.
7768 @end ifset
7769
7770 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7771 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7772 fact or leave it out, state it!
7773
7774 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7775 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7776 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7777 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7778 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7779 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7780 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7781 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7782 and the most helpful.
7783
7784 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7785 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7786 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7787
7788 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7789 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7790 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7791 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7792
7793 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7794
7795 @itemize @bullet
7796 @item
7797 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7798 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7799
7800 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7801 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7802
7803 @item
7804 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7805
7806 @item
7807 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7808 version number.
7809
7810 @item
7811 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7812 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7813
7814 @item
7815 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7816 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7817 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7818
7819 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7820 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7821
7822 @item
7823 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7824 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7825 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7826 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7827 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7828 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7829 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7830
7831 @item
7832 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7833 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7834
7835 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7836 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7837 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7838 make a mistake.
7839
7840 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7841 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7842 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7843 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7844 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7845 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7846 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7847 observations.
7848
7849 @item
7850 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7851 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7852 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7853 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7854 by line number.
7855
7856 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7857 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7858 @end itemize
7859
7860 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7861
7862 @itemize @bullet
7863 @item
7864 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7865
7866 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7867 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7868 changes will not affect it.
7869
7870 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7871 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7872 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7873 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7874
7875 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7876 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7877 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7878 less time, and so on.
7879
7880 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7881 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7882
7883 @item
7884 A patch for the bug.
7885
7886 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7887 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7888 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7889 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7890
7891 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7892 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7893 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7894 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7895
7896 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7897 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7898 help us to understand.
7899
7900 @item
7901 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7902
7903 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7904 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7905 @end itemize
7906
7907 @node Acknowledgements
7908 @chapter Acknowledgements
7909
7910 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7911 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7912 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7913 @c (October 2012),
7914 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7915
7916 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7917 more details?}
7918
7919 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7920 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7921 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7922
7923 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7924 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7925 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7926 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7927 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7928 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7929 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7930 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7931 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7932 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7933
7934 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7935 in format-specific I/O modules.
7936
7937 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7938 has done much work with it since.
7939
7940 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7941
7942 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7943
7944 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7945 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7946
7947 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7948 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7949 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7950 support a.out format.
7951
7952 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7953 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7954 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7955 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7956 targets.
7957
7958 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7959 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7960 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7961 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7962 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7963 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7964 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7965
7966 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7967 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7968 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7969 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7970
7971 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7972
7973 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7974
7975 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7976 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7977 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7978 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7979
7980 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7981 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7982 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7983 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7984 and some initial 64-bit support).
7985
7986 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7987
7988 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7989 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7990
7991 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7992 flavors.
7993
7994 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7995 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7996
7997 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7998 configuration enhancements.
7999
8000 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8001
8002 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8003 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8004 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8005 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8006
8007 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8008 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8009 @include fdl.texi
8010
8011 @node AS Index
8012 @unnumbered AS Index
8013
8014 @printindex cp
8015
8016 @bye
8017 @c Local Variables:
8018 @c fill-column: 79
8019 @c End:
This page took 0.182715 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.